JP7023878B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, when a game ball fired in a game area wins a prize in a predetermined winning opening, the identification information is variably displayed, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a predetermined display result, a game corresponding to the display result is generated. Pachinko game machines that let you play are known. The predetermined display result is, for example, a display result indicating a big hit or a display result indicating a small hit. Further, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that controls a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit gaming state is higher than that in a normal state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that displays a preview image corresponding to a high probability state and a high base state in the game state after the end of the big hit during a round game in the big hit game state (for example, Patent Document 2). reference.).

JP-A-2015-156952 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-135166

However, simply notifying the player of the game state after the end of the big hit does not allow the player to clearly grasp the state in which the game value can be given thereafter, which is not interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

(A) A gaming machine capable of playing games.
A game state control means for controlling the game state, and
Production execution means and
Equipped with
The game state control means can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a small hit state that is different from the advantageous state, and a special state in which the game value is easily given by the small hit state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state in which game value is more easily given by being controlled to the small hit state than the first special state.
After being controlled to the first advantageous state, it can be controlled to the first special state.
After being controlled to the second advantageous state, it can be controlled to the second special state.
When the effect executing means is controlled to the second advantageous state, the effect execution means is controlled to the second advantageous state and then to the second special state, and after being controlled to the second special state, the advantageous state is controlled. A specific display suggesting that the state is controlled is displayed, and when the advantageous state controlled after being controlled by the second special state is again the second advantageous state, the specific display remains displayed. A gaming machine that additionally displays the specific display .
Further, (1) in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game), and is in a gaming state. (For example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) for executing steps S120 to S128 shown in FIG. 6) and an effect executing means (for example, for effect control). The gaming state control means includes a CPU 120), an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), and the special state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which the game value is easily given depending on the state, and the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the current big hit game state: 10R probability variation big hit A). The next jackpot game state using the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol of FIG. 12-2 after being controlled to the special state: 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R It is possible to control to the probabilistic jackpot B or 10R normal jackpot), and the effect executing means is said to be advantageous when controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state: 10R probabilistic jackpot A). Specific display (bonus in FIG. 12-6 (C)) corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states (for example, the second KT state and the next big hit game state) in which the game value can be given as the state after being controlled to the state. (Rush icon 022SH120) can be displayed (for example, the process performed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in step 022SHS15 in FIG. 12-3), and the display mode of the specific display can be used to control the game state by the game state control means. The display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is changed to the red display mode indicating that the jackpot has been completed, as shown in step 022SHS52 of FIG. 12-5 and FIG. 12-6 (E). It is possible).

According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that there are a plurality of states in which the game value can be given as the state after the advantageous state in the advantageous state by the specific display. Thereby, it is possible to clarify the state in which the game value can be subsequently given depending on the advantageous state.
Therefore, for example, the satisfaction of the player in an advantageous state can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the effect executing means has the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state: 10R probability variation jackpot A) and a plurality of states (for example, the gaming value) to which the gaming value can be given. Among the states including the second KT state and the next big hit game state, the display mode of the specific display is changed according to the controlled state (for example, the current big hit game state: 10R probability variation big hit A). It is possible (step 022SHS52 in FIG. 12-5 and FIG. 12-6 (E).
), Bonus rush icon 0 in the red display mode indicating that the jackpot has been completed.
The display mode of 22SH120 can be changed).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the specific display can be changed according to the progress of the game. This makes it possible to clarify the state in which the game value has already been given. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game in the state where the game value is given by the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction due to the fact that the game value has already been given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the specific display has a plurality of different display modes (for example, a red display mode and a yellow display mode), and the effect executing means is a display mode.
Among the states including the advantageous state (for example, the current big hit game state: 10R probability variation big hit A) and a plurality of states (for example, the second KT state and the next big hit game state) to which the game value can be given. , Display mode corresponding to the controlled state (for example, step 02 in FIG. 12-5).
It was controlled to the red display mode corresponding to the completion of the jackpot game shown in 2SHS52 and FIG. 12-6 (E) and the second KT state shown in step 022SHS16 and FIG. 12-6 (E) of FIG. 12-3. It is possible to display a specific display of the yellow display mode) indicating that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the type of the state in which the game value has already been given, depending on the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can easily grasp the type of the state to which the game value is given. Therefore, the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction according to the type of the state in which the game value has already been given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3), the effect executing means is a jackpot shown in a specific mode corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (for example, FIG. 12-6 (E)). The specific display of the red display mode corresponding to the completion of the game) and the specific display of the predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states to which the game value can be given (for example, the bonus of FIG. 12-8 (M)).
Blank icon image shown in rush icon 022SH120 022SH120d, 12
0e) and can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the state in which the game value has already been given and the state in which the game value can be given thereafter, depending on the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can easily grasp the state in which the game value is given and the state in which the game value can be given thereafter. Therefore, the player can obtain a feeling of satisfaction due to the fact that the game value has already been given, and a feeling of expectation that there is a state in which the game value can be given thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4), the effect executing means has the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state) and a plurality of states (for example, the gaming value can be imparted). For example, the specific display can be displayed over a plurality of states including the second KT state and the next big hit game state (for example, FIGS. 12-6 (E) and 12-6 (F)). like,
Bonus rush icon 022SH12 from the jackpot game state to the 2nd KT state
0 can be displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously show the player a state in which the game value can be given even if the state changes from an advantageous state to a state in which the game value can be given. This will result in
Even if the state changes, the player can continuously obtain a feeling of satisfaction that the game value has already been given and a feeling of expectation that there is a state in which the game value can be given thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, the effect executing means has a gaming value given in the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state: the jackpot of the 10R probability variation jackpot A). (For example, the total prize ball number display 022SH130 in FIG. 12-6 (E)) and the game value given in the special state (for example, the second KT state) (for example, FIG. 12-6 (for example).
The total prize ball number display 022SH130) of H) can be displayed over the advantageous state (for example, the first big hit game state) and the special state.

According to such a configuration, even if the state changes, the game value given in the advantageous state and the special state can be clearly shown. As a result, the player can continuously grasp the assigned game value even if the state changes. Therefore, for example, when the given game value is large, the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction, and when the given game value is unexpectedly low, the player's willingness to play. Can stir up. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6), when the effect executing means is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the next big hit gaming state) after being controlled to the special state. In addition, a suggestion effect (for example, the suggestion effect image 022SH116 of FIG. 12-8 (L)) suggesting that the device is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state is executed, and the effect result of the suggestion effect is performed. (For example, corresponding to the success effect image 022SH127 of FIG. 12-8 (M)), a predetermined state corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which the game value can be given as the state after being controlled to the advantageous state after the above. Aspects (eg, step 022SHS36 of FIG. 12-4, or FIG. 12-8.
It is possible to display the specific display of (M) the bonus rush icon (display mode of the blank shown in 022SH120).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to incite whether or not there are a plurality of states (specifically, whether or not the consecutive villas will continue) in which the game value can be subsequently given in the later advantageous state. .. Therefore, even in the later advantageous state, the interest in the advantageous state can be improved as in the case of the earlier advantageous state.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7), the advantageous state before being controlled to the special state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state: 10R probability variation jackpot A) and the special state In the advantageous state after being controlled (for example, the next big hit game state), a common number of round games (for example, 10 rounds) is executed, and the effect executing means is controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state. And when it is controlled to the advantageous state after the above, a common display mode (
For example, the display mode of the bottom icon image 022SH120a shown in FIG. 12-6 (E) and the display mode of the top icon image 022SH120c shown in FIG. 12-7 (N) are common display modes). It is possible to display a specific display of.

According to such a configuration, the game value given in each advantageous state can be made equal, so that the specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be a common display mode. Specifically, the display mode (for example, blank) of the specific display corresponding to the advantageous state that can be given is a common display mode (for example, a blank of the same shape) between the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state. Can be. Further, the display mode (for example, red) of the specific display corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can also be a common display mode between the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state. Therefore, for example, the player can easily grasp the estimation of the game value that can be given and the estimation of the game value that has been given by the number of specific displays. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific display.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). The display and the variable display execution means that can be executed in parallel (for example, FIG. 10-17 and FIG. 10-21 are shown.
The game state control means is further provided with a process executed by the CPU 103), and can be controlled to the advantageous state when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The variable display of the identification information has a higher advantage for the player than the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in the jackpot type determination table of FIGS. 12-2 (A) and 12-2 (B)). The jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol has a higher ratio of being determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot A, and a jackpot with a large number of rounds is selected), and the effect executing means is the first. When the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the identification information and is controlled to the advantageous state, the specific display is deleted (for example, step 022SHS13: YES in FIG. 12-3). → Step 022SHS17: YES
→ The process performed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in step 022SHS18).

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 022SH can simultaneously execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to display a specific display when it is controlled to an advantageous state based on. Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 022SH has a lower advantage for the player in the variable display of the first identification information than in the variable display of the second identification information, the specific display is specified in the variable display of the first identification information. By deriving and displaying the result, the state in which the game value can be given may disappear. Here, even though the state in which the game value can be given has disappeared, if the specific display is displayed, the interest of the game is lowered. Therefore, when the gaming machine of the means 9 is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information, the specific display is erased. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by controlling the first identification information in an advantageous state based on the variable display.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9), the gaming state control means is advantageous when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display. The state can be controlled, and the effect executing means can display the specific display (for example, during execution of the variable display) before the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, during execution of the variable display). Blank icon image 022SH120d, 120 in FIG. 12-12 (B)
e can be added).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing of displaying the specific display and the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to improve not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the variable display.

(11) In the gaming machine of the above (10), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is a display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state for the variable display that has not been started yet (
For example, the pre-start determination means for pre-start determination) is provided, and the effect executing means can display the specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11 (B)). The display mode of the icon image 022SH120b can be changed to a yellow display mode indicating that the icon image 022SH120b is controlled to the second KT state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing of displaying the specific display and the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to improve not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the hold storage before the variable display.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is confirmed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is confirmed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball device in the feature part 052IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards, etc. in a feature part 052IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect decision table at the time of over winning. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of a small hit prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect decision table at the time of a small hit prize. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number emphasis effect effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number emphasis production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start wait process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the setting value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the suggestion effect at the time of an over prize, the suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize, and the suggestion effect at the time of a prize ball number display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the suggestion effect at the time of an over prize, the suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize, and the suggestion effect at the time of a prize ball number display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when it becomes a small hit in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when it becomes a small hit in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when it becomes a small hit in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the game state and the transition of an effect mode after a big hit game which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect mode setting process which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display correspondence display control processing which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the initial color determination table and the final color determination table of the variable display correspondence display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when it is controlled to a small hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when it is controlled to a small hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination table of various suggestion effects. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect execution process of the variable display correspondence display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen in a small hit RUSH mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect which changes the display mode of the hold display in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the Gase effect of the effect which changes the display mode of the hold display in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting value suggestion effect in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the probability change suggestion effect in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the game state and the transition of an effect mode after a big hit game in a feature part 022SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the jackpot type determination table of the feature part 022SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a bonus rush icon control process at the start of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus rush icon control processing during a round game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus rush icon control processing of an ending period. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the production screen of a normal mode → small hit RUSH mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the production screen of a small hit RUSH mode → Chan time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen when the small hit RUSH mode continues. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus rush icon control processing in a variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the bonus rush icon display change determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen at the time of changing the display mode of a bonus rush icon during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen which concerns on modification 1 when the display mode of a bonus rush icon is changed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). First to do
A special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. Special symbols include numbers indicating "0" to "9" and ""
It is represented by a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is controlled to be lit by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
Variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, "
The decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display in which execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lighting-controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25 configured to include a plurality of LEDs is included.
A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the first hold indicator 25B according to the number of LEDs lit. The second reserved storage number is displayed.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2, and the first starting opening switch 2 is used.
Detected by 2A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the gaming area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done.
In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, the case where the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row of nails 19 is shown. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first start winning opening only when the mouth is provided on the left side of the game area and the row of nails 19 is also provided so that the left-handed operation is performed.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom surface member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction.
The large winning opening located below the bottom member is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. Special variable winning ball device 7
Moved the bottom member forward in the jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. These special variable winning ball devices 17 and variable winning ball devices 6B
Is located below the bottom member by moving the plate-shaped bottom member, which extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, in the front-rear direction. The special winning opening and the second starting winning opening are changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which the game ball can be won and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 17 is
In the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward toward the front. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol display 2
When the symbol hits 0 and the symbol is derived and displayed, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the second start winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Execute open control.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6 are used.
B is formed so as to have a similar structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves from the upper left to the lower right and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below the special variable winning ball device 7.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B if the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared to the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be open and the large winning opening is opened,
It will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the large winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the large winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) through the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins in the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) another prize opening such as the first start winning opening 1 or the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time) is in progress, the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and launches (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are located at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.
Is provided, and a frame LED 9 for a game effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. )
A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. Pachinko game machine 1
When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A by performing a left-handing operation by the rotation operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided by the player, the first special symbol display device 4A performs the left-handing operation. 1 The special figure game is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ”, the actual design differs depending on the type of jackpot described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be configured to be a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, the opening mode of the big winning opening (
Multiple types of game states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state (number of rounds and open upper limit period) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As a big hit type, a big hit type that can get many prize balls and
A jackpot type with few or almost no prize balls may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), the probabilistic change control is executed in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game more than in the normal state. The high base state is a special symbol (especially the second)
Since the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state,
It is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed operation by rotating the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol lost".
Will be. When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ”, the actual design differs depending on the type of jackpot described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. note that,
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the frame LED 9
It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. )
Is also stopped and displayed (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, "6" etc.) may be displayed together as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
The decorative symbol constituting the chance eye is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. Besides,
On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
And so on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A).
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10.
4 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, ROM 10
Various data stored in 1 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). Controls (drives) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc.
It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal (a signal to be driven, a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) The detection signal (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )))
, The game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in 121 are used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a controller sensor unit 35A or a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute the effect based on the detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character G).
It is equipped with enerator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the effect image to the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.
To display. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the LED) is supplied to the LED control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 12
3 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a mode designated by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off.
In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 has various random numbers (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects.
Numerical data indicating is counted up to date. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from, for example, a main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, L).
It is configured to include an output port for transmitting an ED signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3).
). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, C
The PU 103 is an RA that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102.
Perform M clear processing and set the initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), RAM
It is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.).
In addition, the state of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in 02 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 checks the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. If it is determined that these match, RAM10
It is determined that the data of 2 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), CP
The U103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 is
An appropriate screen display may be performed based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (.
Step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 10 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).
It is sent to 3 and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 10
3. First, by executing a predetermined switch process, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 are executed via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not the detection signal is received from various switches such as (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Information indicating the number of winnings, etc.)
, Data such as probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state has occurred) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). C
When the PU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Also, CPU103
Executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). By executing the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). By executing the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 realizes control of the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26).
). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, C
The PU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the gaming machine can be confirmed outside the gaming machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period for performing a right-handed operation. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process processing, C
First, the PU 103 executes the first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, the occurrence of the start winning to the first starting winning opening is detected, and the RAM 10
The process of storing the hold information in the predetermined area of 2 and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, the look-ahead determination, etc. on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is controlled by the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. Each process of the first special symbol process process (step S)
In 110A to S113A), transmission settings are made for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12.

In the first special symbol normal processing of step S110A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0".
It is executed when (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is determined based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the first fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111A, the value of the first special figure process flag is ".
It is executed at the time of "1". In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes a process of determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns using. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

In the first special symbol variation process of step S112A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2".
Is executed at. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol fluctuation processing is completed. do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed.
When the variation display of the special symbol is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variation display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be set to 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be set to 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, regarding the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the gaming state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

In the first special symbol stop process of step S113A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3".
Is executed at. In this first special symbol stop processing, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (
It includes a process to make settings for (deriving). Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103).
) Determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, whether or not the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the small hit opening pre-processing to the small hit end processing). Judgment), if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag should not be changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process, and if it is not in the small hit game, the second special figure process The value of the flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the first
During the small hit game based on the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol,
The process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol may be interrupted (timer update is interrupted).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process processing, the CPU 10
3 is step S12 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102.
Select and execute any of the processes from 0 to S128. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end process of step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the special winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2) based on the register setting of CTC, for example.
It is set to the on state every time (milliseconds) elapses. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 is automatically set to disable interrupts, but when a CPU that is not automatically disabled is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s) Clear the timer interrupt flag to turn it off (step S74), and execute the command analysis process (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. Will be. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1 may be stored so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like.
The reception flag provided in 22 is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and a drive of a movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as operation is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 may be, for example, a RAM 12
Depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in 2, the following steps S170 to S1
One of the 77 processes is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. Image display device 5
When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in, the value of the effect process flag is set to ".
Update to 1 ”and end the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 can be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 can be driven, and the voice control board 13 can be driven. Speakers 8L, 8 by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to
Various types of decorative symbols are displayed during variable display, such as outputting voice and sound effects from R, and turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting commands (illumination signals) to the LED control board 14. Execute production control. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed based on the set content. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. be"
Update to 5 ”and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the jackpot production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

What is displayed during the variable display of a special symbol is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-").
However, the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).
..

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular Bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, the expression (“high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”
Expressions such as "low" and "differentiate") may include that one is in the proportion of "0%". For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM01 as shown in FIG. 9-1.
Various control boards such as 6 are mounted. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a main board 1
Relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between 1 and the effect control board 12.
Etc. are also installed. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various parts are connected, and the speaker 8L, 8R, and frame L are connected to the effect control board 12.
Various production devices such as ED9 are connected, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, the board case 21T.
It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being stored in the M201, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly
It is an example of command information addressed to a sub-side control board consisting of a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. It has a function to output and send control commands as control signals, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided with various winning information regarding winning. It also has a function to display. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the display changeover switch 21 is provided.
It is possible to switch the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by operating the TM030.

In addition to detection signals from, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for game ball detection, various signals such as a power supply cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal are incorporated into the main board 11 to capture a game control microcomputer. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to the 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is enclosed in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Main board 11
Is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, so the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized is when the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened is visually recognized. It is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entry area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various winning information such as the ratio and the winning ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information are displayed. This makes it possible to check various winning information such as the ratio of consecutive ratios and the ratio of roles after installation in the amusement park. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. again,
When conducting the test, it is confirmed whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

Further, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material.
At the bottom right of the back of the power supply board, there is a clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later.
2 and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 on each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. The operating voltage of is supplied. Furthermore, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated,
If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05
Reference numeral 2 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It becomes operable. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned ON and O by a predetermined key.
Although it is a switch capable of executing the switching operation of the FF, it may be a switch capable of executing the switching operation and performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation).

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk of the game hall or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured so that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, at the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a fired game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9, and decoration. It contains LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21
The TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is a payout control C.
Payout control microcomputer 21 with PU21TM371, RAM and ROM
It is realized by TM370 and I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A pachinko / pachislot machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the door frame 3a is connected, and various abnormalities are obtained based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. 21TM37
0 makes it possible to distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is the relay board 21TM07.
It is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via 2.
The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and the game ball is clogged.
That is, it is used to detect so-called ball biting. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 is a ball-out switch 21T.
If the detection signal from M187 indicates a full ball state or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state,
The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a low-level full tank signal to the launching board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launching from the ball launching device. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the launch board 21.
It is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the TM090, and is a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (a signal for driving the launch motor 21TM094, which serves to supply power from the power supply board. The signal to be fulfilled) is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a full tank signal, the launch motor 21TM094
The output of the launch motor signal to is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a serial communication circuit 21T for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 by serial communication.
M380 is built-in. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 10
0 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are serial communication circuits 21TM.
Signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second) to confirm the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the game control microcomputer 100 and 21TM380. ) Is being exchanged (sent and received). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, is a signal notifying that fact (reception A).
The CK signal) is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment,
By superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are specified at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange data. For example, when a prize is awarded, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize is set. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM3
When the prize ball payout operation is completed, the 70 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by making a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal different, and transmits the received ACK signal with the setting to the game control microcomputer 100. do. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by making the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal different, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including) 21TM160 is output. Although the driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, FIG. 9-2
The description is omitted in.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has an output port 21TM37.
An error signal is output to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via 2c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Furthermore, the payout motor 21TM from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370
The drive signal to 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is located outside the output port 21TM372a.
Is installed, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A microcomputer for controlling the card unit is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 has a frequency display LED.
21TM060, ball lending possible LED 21TM061, ball lending switch 21TM062 and return switch 21TM063 are connected.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066 are provided with a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal.
A connection signal (VL) between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037.
Signal), unit operation signal (BRDY signal), ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) are input ports 21TM.
It is transmitted and received via the 372f and the output port 21TM372d. Card unit 21
Between TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, the interface board 21TM066
Is intervening. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted / received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 has a card unit 21TM050.
PRDY signal is output to. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. Microcomputer for payout control 21TM37
0 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer uses the payout control board 2
The BRQ signal is output to 1TM037.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a card unit 21T.
When the EXS signal for M050 is raised and the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21T
The M370 lowers the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. after that,
On condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is the payout control board 21T.
It is supplied from M037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066.
It is done through. In this example, the card unit 2 is connected to the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066.
A fuse for protecting 1TM050 is provided to prevent the card unit 21TM050 from being supplied with a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate.
That is, when 6 is set as the set value, it is most advantageous for the player.
The smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage is.

9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value as a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/30)
You will win a big hit at 0).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/28)
You will win a big hit at 0).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (
1/280) to win the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". "2", "3"
It is designed to win a big hit with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". "2", "3"
, "4", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". "2", "3"
, "4", "5", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. In addition, Fig. 9-4
The "probability" shown in (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. It is provided separately, and the big hit is determined by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. Figure 9-5 (1),
(2) and (3) show an example of a setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen.
Further, FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 sets the set value specified by the received setting command to R.
By storing in AM102, it is possible to determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, a character (“B”) that notifies the image display device 5 that the jackpot game state has ended, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends.
It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the stored setting value together with the character (character of "ONUS end").

In the table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), when the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the “sunny” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), FIG. 9-5 (2).
When determining the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 and when determining the "rainy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (3), the determination values are assigned.

In the effect control CPU 120, the set value specified by the received setting command is "1" or ".
In the case of "2", it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low ratio (for example, 20%), and a medium ratio (for example, 40%). and(
Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in 2).
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). Further, the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4".
It was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1), and the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) was performed at a high rate (for example, 50%). ) Decided to carry out, and at a moderate rate (eg 30%) the "rain" shown in (3)
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the aspect. Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21).
TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), CPU103
Is that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is a regular value, for example, 0 to 0 to
It is confirmed whether or not it matches any of 5 (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and six levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (step S21)
YES in TM4020), and confirm whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030),
The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S)
21TM4040 YES), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, RA.
It indicates that it has been decided that M clear will be executed. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300.
The detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the opening of the glass door frame 3a. A detection signal indicating that the state has been detected is output.
When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected. Recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected,
By notifying the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 side has the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to individually recognize the open state.

The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, for the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. And lock switch 21TM
If 051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), it is shown in FIG. 9-7.
Processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode,
Move to. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (step S21T).
YES in M4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020)
), If the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030)
), The setting value can be changed and / or confirmed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). It becomes. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Step S21TM4 described later without being controlled by the mode.
Move to 760 (send setting command).

In the present embodiment, in order to set the state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed although the setting value is not permitted to be changed, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2). ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. CPU
In 103, when it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), (3) clear switch (setting changeover switch)
A state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) as described later, provided that the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that the 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). It is possible to move to.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state. I can't. Even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value in such a state, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition of (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is described in step S21TM47 described later.
Move to 60 (send setting command). Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM407).
0), without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010),
If the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 will
The process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area.
If is not stored (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 will
The process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Also, in the check of the setting changing flag (
In step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 is set to step S21T.
Move to M4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). CPU
When 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (
YES in step S21TM4120), confirming whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130).

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130)
), The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S)
21TM4140 YES), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is closed, step S21TM413
At 0, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (step S21TM4).
NO in 130), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state in step S21TM4140 (N in step S21TM4140)
In O), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. The error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value error error command, the image display device 5
Notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily turns off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned off) in the image display device 5.
), Then when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on), the mode is changed to the setting change mode and an operation for changing the set value is performed (the set value is confirmed). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined loop process (step S) until the power is turned off.
21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 are repeated).

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 has a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM420).
After performing 0), by displaying the letter "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc.,
"The transition condition for controlling the setting change mode even though the set value may not be a normal value (0 to 5) is satisfied (all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). Not so, and the setting change mode has not been entered ”(step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21T).
M4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.). Will be done.

The loop processing period is 4 m on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029.
The letter "E" will be displayed for each s. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. Further, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 will be continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (step S2).
When 1TM4010 is NO), the set value is not a normal value (step S21TM4020).
NO) or when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030). If applicable, the game should not be played in this state, and the set value before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.). It is necessary to fix the setting value of the storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode), (1).
) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state.
(3) The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. 3
Two conditions are required. The CPU 103 is subjected to these (1) by the determination processing of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140.
)-(3) When it is confirmed that all of the conditions are satisfied, it is possible to shift to the state where the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the setting value cannot be changed, so that the setting value in the setting value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. It is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (step S21TM4).
(NO at 030), although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (step S2).
Two conditions are required: 1TM4060 YES) and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4).
YES at 030), (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (step S21TM4120).
Yes), (2) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4).
Even if the two conditions of YES) in 130 are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied,
(3) Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 in step S21TM4140
When it is determined that 2 is not in the ON state (NO), it is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Will be.

Next, with respect to the processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, FIGS. 9-7 and 9
This will be described using -8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). Regular value (0 to 5) in the set value storage area
) Is stored (YES in step S21TM4510), step S21
Move to TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability as a regular value in the set value storage area, "0". Is stored (step S21TM4520).
Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, R
Processing to turn on the backup flag indicating that data will be backed up to AM102,
Data protection processing of the RAM 102 and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, the check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S).
Repeated processing from 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or step S21T
If a power failure occurs during the iterative processing of M4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650), step S21TM40 after power restoration occurs.
The data check will be properly executed at 10.

Next, the CPU 103 uses the set value stored in the set value storage area (0 to 5 in this example).
The value corresponding to is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4550).
). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is set to
It is set to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Then CPU1
03 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570)
YES), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command specifying that the mode has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4650). , Step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CP
U103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may have been changed (step S21TM4580). The area where the value of the setting changing flag is stored is
Since it is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, and the game control microcomputer 100
Can be identified as having transitioned to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and steps S21TM4.
Move to 680. The updated setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the clerk of the game hall operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If so, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S).
21TM4590) and the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed.
The period controlled by the setting confirmation mode is from step S21TM4530 to step S21.
The processes of TM4570 and step S21TM4650 will be repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21T).
M4070 is judged as YES), clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052
Is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag remains 0).

In addition, the current set value can be displayed (step S21TM4550) and the security signal can be output (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620).
The state in which the above can be executed corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21T).
M4070 or step S21TM4130 determines YES), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140, and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150. It is controlled based on what is set).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag, which can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting change mode command is transmitted, and sets the setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

The CPU 103 confirms in step S21TM4680 whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms is again (step S21T).
After performing M4530), the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, R
If the value of the AM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (YES).
Step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output processing when the normal game processing is subsequently performed. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560).
Corresponding to the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, by standardizing the output start control and output end control of the security signal between the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the output control of the security signal is simplified. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, step S21T immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed.
In M4710, a common value (1000 ms) is set in the security signal timer when controlled in the setting change mode and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, step S21 is once performed.
After setting 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in TM4710, reset (overwrite) 30000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. ). That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from, and when it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is the timing when 30 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, if the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the timer for game control after the interrupt is permitted is interrupted. In processing (for example, information output processing), the value of the security signal timer is 10.
The output of the security signal is continued from 00 ms to 0 ms, and when the setting change mode is controlled (when the RAM is cleared, the value of the security signal timer is 1).
(When changed from seconds to 30 seconds), the security signal is output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. Will be continued. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the security signal timer value is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 3) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process when the setting change mode is controlled.
The output of the security signal may be continued from (0000 ms) to 0 ms, and the game control timer interrupt process may be started after the output of the security signal is completed.

In this way, the security signal will be continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed or the control of the setting change mode is completed.
When controlled to the setting change mode, 30 seconds after the control of the setting change mode is completed.
The security signal will be continuously output until the elapse of. With such a configuration, when the security signal output control is standardized and controlled in the setting confirmation mode,
The output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the setting change mode is controlled.

As a result, it is also possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process is executed and controlled to the setting change mode. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, it is the initial period. It is possible to estimate that the conversion process may have been executed and controlled to the setting change mode.

In addition, even when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor,
A security signal will be output. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, RAM clear will be executed, so the abnormality detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power cutoff occurs). It is sometimes unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the output period of the security signal is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (0) stored in the set value storage area.
(Any of 5) is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S).
21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the effect control CPU 12
If the value specified by the setting command (value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is on the 0 side, the player may misunderstand the set value. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. For C
It may be transmitted to PU120. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Also, CP for production control
It is not necessary to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command on the U120 side, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770).
That is, the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S).
It is determined that the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020) with 21TM4010), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (step S21T).
NO for M4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is O.
Since it is in the FF state (NO in step S21TM4040), it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without RAM clear.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

In the effect control CPU 120, the recovery from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery) (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9
It is possible to notify that the recovery from the power failure has been performed (RAM clearing has not been performed) based on the data at the time when the power supply is stopped.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag of 1 (step S21TM1410). In RAM clear processing, R
The data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of AM102 is cleared and the initial value is set. , The set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). RA
By the M clear process, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for normal symbol hit determination) is initialized to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be changed to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it was stored (YES in step S21TM4020).
, (B) When controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520), or the regular value is stored by the operation in the setting change mode (step S21TM4610). And step S21TM4620).
Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). Step S21TM1
By the processing of 430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21T).
M1450). In the game control timer interrupt processing described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read out here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization process has been performed at the time of turning on the power (or at the end of the setting change mode) (step S21TM1460). Production control CPU 120
Then, the initialization process was performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM was cleared without recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply was stopped). Recognize. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, step S21TM4 after the setting change mode ends.
The value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in 710 will be changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), this step S21TM14
Since the process of 65 is not executed, the value of the security signal timer is set to step S21TM47.
It remains at 1 second set at 10.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-mentioned step S21TM4710, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, the value of the security signal timer is 2 m each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission.
It is subtracted by s, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11
A connection confirmation signal is output to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (
Step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program, causes the random number circuit 104 to determine the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.
Make settings to update the value of.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 is subjected to a predetermined time (for example, 2).
ms) The CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every time. That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, 2 m
It is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every s.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (ordinary symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. A game control process that controls the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one round (normal symbol hit judgment random number is taken). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but the process is not limited to such a form, and step S
When the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) by 21TM4770, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). (Depending on the state of the frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of recovery from the power failure.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a)
However, not limited to such a form, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) on condition that the power is turned on (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a).
You may move to.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park, etc., turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on.
By setting the N state and turning the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to the ON state, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode and initialize the gaming state (RAM clear). It is possible to execute). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Do not initialize (step S21TM40
40 or step S21TM4140 to determine NO and not set the RAM clear flag to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM42
The loop processing of 20) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in a state where the set value is unstable, and when the power is turned on, the game is prevented from being executed.
It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was cut off.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). If step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a setting value error error command is transmitted (the setting value abnormality error command is transmitted).
With step S21TM4190), the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 ~
In step S21TM4220 loop processing), "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.
An error display for displaying the characters of (step S21TM4210) is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the setting value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3
Is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (ii) lock switch 21T.
M051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii).
The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21).
If it is determined to be YES) in TM4140, it is controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM0)
The display of "E" in 29) is not executed, and the message display ("display" on the effect control board 12 side is not executed.
After turning off the power, turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode. ") Will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 operation). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052.
By operating, after changing the set value stored in the set value storage area to the planned set value, by switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, the set value is confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be transferred to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, the above (i) to (ii).
If any of the conditions in i) is not satisfied, the setting change mode is not controlled.
After the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), the game is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21T)
The display of "E" in M029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode") is also performed. ..

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ")
If this is also the case, it is notified that the game machine is in a state where the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied after the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. understands that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be transferred to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a),
Error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM029)
The setting change mode is automatically shifted to without displaying "E" in (1), and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in a state, the game is forcibly stopped (step S21TM420).
It is controlled by 0 to step S21TM4220 loop processing), and an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" in the display monitor 21TM029) is performed on the main board 11 side. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030).
ES), the case where all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, and the case where any of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) is not satisfied. A different command may be sent as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). The effect control CPU 120 that sends a command indicating
Then, it is advisable to display the message "the setting value may be abnormal" and the message "automatically controlled to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, step S21TM4 as described above.
It is advisable to send an error command with an abnormal setting value of 190.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is started, when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21T.
In response to the operation of M051 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the game control microcomputer 100 sends a lock switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting changeover switch. (Clear switch) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the game control microcomputer 100 sends a setting changeover switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120. become.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) has a lock switch operation command.
And / or, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the operation for changing the setting value was performed even though neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode was controlled. Can be specified and notified to that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 has a lock switch 21TM after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started.
Whether or not 051 was operated, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052
The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the operation has been performed. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140).
Only when it is confirmed that the three conditions of ,, are satisfied, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step S21T).
NO with M4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii).
) Is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without confirming whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step S21TM4).
NO) may be set at 570.

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If it is (step S)
The RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether or not the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied in (YES) of 21TM4030, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (step). The portion that is not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that it is in the state and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if the power is cut off while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is established,
Workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030).
In ES), (ii) lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM).
Even if the condition of YES) in 4130 is not satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode.
By operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the state,
The set value stored in the set value storage area will be changed (step S in FIG. 9-7).
21TM4610 to step S21TM4620).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to set the lock switch 21TM051 to O.
Switching from the N state to the OFF state (determining YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S21T).
M4680 will be judged as YES).

In this way, when the setting changing flag is not set (step S21TM40).
NO in 30), and when the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM40)
30), the conditions for starting the control of the setting change mode are different, while the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are standardized. The conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode are clarified so that the normal game processing can be appropriately performed.

Here, the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030).
), The lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the setting change mode is controlled.
It is also possible to give a notification prompting the state. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and sends a setting value error error command (to step S21TM4190 described above). The effect control CPU 120 that received the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game field side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to surely control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode), FIG. This will be described using -12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled.
In this example, when the power is turned on, the set value is set to "0" in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. Next, as shown in order 2, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out with the start of the setting change mode, and the read setting value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the first setting changeover switch (
Clear switch) Based on the operation of 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "0" to "1", and 1 is added to the changed setting value "2". Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Lock switch 21TM05 at this point
1 remains in the ON state. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, 2
Based on the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "1" to "2", and the changed setting value is 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is stored in the set value storage area.
In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the RAM 102 is associated with the start of the setting change mode.
The set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of is read, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, the set value is changed in the setting change mode, and the lock switch 21TM0
If the power is turned off without turning off 51 (without terminating the setting change mode), the changed setting value in the previous setting change mode is retained in the setting value storage area when the power is restored. It is in the state of being done. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may have been set. In this case, the clerk at the pachinko / pachislot hall may end the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the gaming machine may be shifted to the normal gaming process, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12 (2).

The order 1 to the order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051
The setting change mode ends when is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the fixed set value.

After that, as shown in the order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power off state, R
The setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of AM102.
Will be retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. This set value "2" is a value finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the RAM 102 is associated with the start of the setting change mode.
The set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of is read, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and 9-12, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 9-12. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. 21
When TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the operation to end the setting change mode (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area and the setting value is confirmed. May be. In this case, the display monitor 21TM029
The setting value to be displayed in is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 will also change according to the change.

With such a configuration, it is controlled to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and even when the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is made. Without completing the operation to end the change mode (lock switch 21TM0
If the power is cut off (without switching the 51 to the OFF state), the RAM 10
The set value stored in the set value storage area of 2 has not been changed since the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is
The value corresponds to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value when the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not terminated, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided for a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to gaming machines (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following inventions.

As shown in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine that outputs a "big hit signal" or the like from an external output terminal of a main control board. For gaming machines as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for the external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. be. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the gaming machine of a control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of the means O1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). It is a gaming machine 1), and the setting value can be confirmed with the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can control the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. Setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM) that can be controlled in various setting confirmation modes.
A game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing 4570 and step S21TM4650), and a specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) corresponding to the start of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. (Step S21TM45
A game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal at 60) and a setting means (a game control microcomputer that sets a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) related to a period during which a specific signal is output. The computer 100) and the setting means can set a common predetermined value between the case of being controlled by the setting change mode and the case of being controlled by the setting confirmation mode (security signal timer in step S21TM4710). 1 second is set as the value of), and the specific signal output means corresponds to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses. Output a specific signal (The security signal is continuously output until 1 second has passed from the end of the setting confirmation mode due to the end of the setting confirmation mode, and 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode when the setting change mode ends. It is characterized by continuously outputting a security signal until it elapses. According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of the means O2 is a gaming machine of the means O1 and is an initialization means (initializing means for initializing the gaming state).
A game control microcomputer 100) that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150 is provided, and the initialization means accompanies the control of the setting change mode. After initializing the game state (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode), the setting means sets the predetermined value (in step S21TM4710). After setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer), it is possible to set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value (when RAM clear is executed, security is performed in step S21TM1465). 30 seconds can be set as the value of the signal timer), and the specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode. (The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). According to this, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is completed and the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the setting is changed. When controlled to the mode, a specific signal will be output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value.
It is possible to set different output periods in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while standardizing the setting processing by the setting means.

The gaming machine of the means O3 is a gaming machine of the means O1 or the means O2, and in the setting change mode, a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (step S21TM4680).
Specific information storage means (backup of RAM 102) that stores specific information (setting changing flag) when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the lock switch 21TM051 OFF detection). In the area, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode. ), And when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). (When it is determined), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied.
It is characterized in that it is possible to repeatedly execute the process until the power is turned off. According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The gaming machine of the means O4 is any of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to the means O3, and is a gaming control means for controlling the progress of the game (a gaming control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process). 100) and the effect control means (CPU 1 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
20), and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029) and the setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620).
In the game control microcomputer 100) that executes the process of, and in the setting change mode, a specific operation for terminating the setting change mode is not performed (step S).
Specific information storage means for storing specific information when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (without detecting the operation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off by 21TM4680)
In the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode. When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (step S2 at the time of power restoration).
When it is determined in 1TM4030 that the setting changing flag is set), it is possible to execute error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (set value in step S21TM4190). An error command is sent, and "E" is sent to the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210.
(It is possible to display the characters), and the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation for changing the set value in response to receiving the error command.
After the power is turned off, turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode. ”Is displayed. According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the gaming hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of the means P1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). In the game machine 1), the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and the setting change mode. Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be specified to be controlled (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the step is based on the end of the setting change mode. The game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in S21TM4720), and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the specific information is stored). The value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (power recovery). When it is determined in step S21TM4030 of the time that the setting changing flag is set), an error notification means capable of executing error notification (when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied, an error occurs in step S21TM4210). It is characterized by further including a game control microcomputer 100) for displaying. According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of the means P2 is a gaming machine of the means P1, and the setting change mode control means satisfies the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state. ,
The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), so that the setting change mode can be controlled, and power supply to the game machine is started. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the setting change condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, step S21TM at the time of turning on the power).
Based on the fact that all of them are determined to be YES in 4140, the setting change mode is entered without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that. According to this, when the condition controlled by the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. You can encourage changes.

The gaming machine of the means P3 is a gaming machine of the means P1 or the means P2, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (power supply). When it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of recovery that the setting changing flag is set), the error notification can be executed and the game can be stopped (when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered. If the migration condition is not satisfied (step S2)
If NO is determined in any of 1TM4120 to step S21TM4140),
Step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4 without shifting to the setting change mode
It is characterized by shifting to 220 loop processing). According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of the means P4 is any of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3, and is a gaming control means for controlling the progress of the game (a gaming control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process). 100) and the effect control means (CPU 1 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
20), and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM46).
The game control microcomputer 100) that executes the process of 20 and the specific information storage means, and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. (When it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the display means executes the error notification and sends an error command to the effect control means. Is possible (
The setting value error error command is transmitted in step S21TM4190, and step S21TM
It is possible to display the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of 4210), and the effect control means performs an operation for changing the set value in response to receiving the error command. It is characterized by giving a prompting notification (displaying a message on the image display device 5 "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode"). According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified.
You can be prompted to change the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). In the game machine 1), the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and the setting change mode. Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be specified to be controlled (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the step is based on the end of the setting change mode. The game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in S21TM4720), and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the specific information is stored). The value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and the setting change mode control means is
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON. Regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode of being in a state is satisfied, the setting change mode is automatically controlled). According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the gaming state. It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150).
RAM clear based on the clear flag set (step S21TM14)
A game control microcomputer 100) for executing 10) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of the means Q2 is a gaming machine of the means Q1, and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. If not, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (step S2).
1TM4030 NO), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM0
51 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1. (Because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the ON state, RA after the setting change mode ends.
(M clear is executed)), the setting change mode is started based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. Controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting change mode is used. Regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to are satisfied, the setting change mode is automatically controlled). According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q3 is a gaming machine of the means Q1 or the means Q2, and the setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (settings are being changed when the power is turned on). When the flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and
The condition for shifting to the setting change mode that the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state) is satisfied. It was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in the specific operation (step S21TM4680) when the setting change mode was controlled based on the setting change mode. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the above, and the specific information storage means stores the specific information when controlled by the setting change mode (control of the setting change mode is started). The setting changing flag is set at the timing of step S21TM4580), and the specific information is deleted when the setting change mode ends based on the specific operation (at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends). (Clearing the setting changing flag), the setting change mode control means performs the transition operation when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Regardless of whether or not it has been performed, the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YE in step S21TM4030).
S), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, the setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (step S21TM4680). The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of the means Q4 is any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3, and is a set value for storing a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). A storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) is provided, and control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.).
Is possible, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is changed in step S21TM4610. When operated, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed), and the setting change mode control means is based on the specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled. Is completed (step S2)
The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in 1TM4680), and the setting value storage means performs the specific operation when controlled by the setting change mode. When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without any trouble, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode is continuously stored (the setting value storage area is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102). It is formed, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed, so that the power supply is performed during the setting change mode. Even if a disconnection occurs, the set value after being changed by the change operation is retained). According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power off occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3, and is a set value for storing a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). A storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) is provided, and control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.).
The setting change mode control means can perform the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21 in the setting change mode).
When TM052 is operated, only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed, not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area), based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed and the setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting information is temporarily set at that time. The setting value stored in the storage area is stored in the setting value storage area and confirmed as a valid setting value, and the setting change mode is terminated), and the setting value storage means is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the setting value before the change operation is performed in the setting change mode is stored (setting switching during the setting change mode). Lock switch 21TM051 even when the switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated
If is not switched to OFF, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained. It is characterized by being). According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not terminated, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

(Explanation of feature section 052IW)
Next, the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 052IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed on the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, the second K
In the T state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the variable winning ball device 6 is a normal figure.
The probability that B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. The rate of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, while the rate of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later). (Except for the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is in the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which it is more likely to be a small hit.

Further, the feature unit 052IW is configured so that the time required from the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, the feature unit 052IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be won in the variable winning ball device 6B as it is.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the feature unit 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom surface member 052IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the bottom surface member 052IW108 is provided in the jackpot game state. Bottom member 0 from the closed state moved forward toward the front
By moving the 52IW108 backward, the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is
Further, it is guided to the guidance path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7.
The guidance path 052IW100 is further branched into two paths 052IW102,103, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 052IW100 is guided to the left side path 052IW102 or the right side path 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball is in the discharge area 052IW1.
It enters 05 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the V region opening / closing plate 0 is located near the entrance of the left side route 052IW102.
When the 52IW101 is provided and the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, the game ball guided to the guidance path 052IW100 enters the left path 052IW102 and V.
It is possible to enter the area 052IW104. Further, when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guidance path 052IW100 is on the right path 052IW10.
It enters 3 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the present feature unit 052IW, when controlled by the big hit game, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 after the end of the big hit game. It is controlled to a probabilistic state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of the number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 in one round is the first count switch 23.
If the number of game balls does not match the number of game balls detected by, it may be determined that a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error is made, and the error may be notified. In this case, since it takes some time for the game ball that has won a prize just before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed to reach the V area 052IW104 or the discharge area 052IW105, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, it may be configured to determine a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error.

(Structure of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 052IW.
In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21 and a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B).
), Count switch (1st count switch 23 and 2nd count switch 24))
V area switch 052IW106 and emission area switch 05 in addition to the detection signal from
2 The detection signal from the IW 107 is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 has a solenoid circuit 111.
Solenoid drive signals from the game control microcomputer 100 are added to the solenoid 81 for ordinary electric accessories, the solenoid 82 for the big winning door, the solenoid 83 for the special winning door, and the solenoid for the V area opening / closing plate 052IW101. It is transmitted to 052IW109.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, Fig. 10-3
And, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values “1” to “6”. Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps,
For example, the setting may be changeable in 2 to 5 stages, or the setting may be changeable in 7 or more stages.

First, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "6" is the case of the set value "6".
It is the highest at 247/65536, which is the most advantageous setting for the player. again,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), and the set value " The case of "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), the set value is "1" to
Regardless of which of "6", and regardless of whether it is a non-probability state (low probability state) or a probabilistic state (high probability state), the small hit probability is "6298/65536". It is constant. That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. In this way, even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value, FIG. 10-3 (A),
As shown in (B), the deviation probabilities may be different between the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determined values for each set value is matched.

Next, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 10-4. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "6" is the case of the set value "6".
It is the highest at 247/65536, which is the most advantageous setting for the player. again,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), and the set value " The case of "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding small hits, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), the set values "1" to
Regardless of which of "6", and regardless of whether it is a non-probability state (low probability state) or a probabilistic state (high probability state), the small hit probability is "62986/65536". It is constant. That is, in this example, the judgment value for small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value.
Moreover, it is common to the non-probable state and the probable state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). In this way, even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value, FIG. 10
-4 As shown in (A) and (B), the number of determination values for each set value may be matched by differentiating the deviation probabilities between the set values "1" and "6".

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 10). -3 and Figure 10
As shown in -4, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). The determination value corresponding to the deviation is different depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, when the probability of loss is 0 (that is,).
It may be configured so that there is a setting value) that does not include the determination value corresponding to the deviation. For example, in the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, when the small hit probability is 0 (that is,).
It may be configured so that there is a determination value) that does not include the determination value corresponding to the small hit. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. good.

In addition, in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of losing is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability increases with respect to the non-probability change state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability change state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a gaming machine having a substantially number of configurable stages of less than 6 stages or a gaming machine having no difference in advantage due to the setting changing function, a gaming machine of a type having a setting changing function of 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. 6R normal jackpot, "6R probability variable jackpot", or "1"
It is a table referred to for determining one of "0R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the variable display is executed. 9% chance of being determined as "10R probability variation jackpot", 56% probability of being determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 35
It is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "10R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability,
There is a 50% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", a 5% chance that it will be a "2R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "2R normal jackpot".

The "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, "6R probability change jackpot" is
It is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature unit 052IW, "10R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6"
In the case of "R normal big hit", a big prize is won until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the big hit game or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won. The mouth is controlled to be open, and up to 10 large winning mouths can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes in the large prize openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIGS. 10-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" based on the random number for determining the hit type.
, "Small hit B", or "Small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the variable display is executed. It is determined as "small hit A" with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), this feature portion 05
In 2IW, regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "6", when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined as "small hit B" with a probability of 70%, and 30 It is determined as "small hit C" with a probability of%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect to win a game ball in the special winning opening. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 10-14), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected most.

(Variation pattern table)
10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature portion 052IW. EX shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9
T is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the fluctuation pattern #n (n)
= 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) is shown. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability /
In the case of the first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. Figure 1
As shown in 0-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) is shown. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. again,
The second variation pattern # 02 is also determined when it is determined to be a small hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, even when the big hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 052IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special prize opening. Will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By reducing the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state. In the feature unit 052IW, the "small hit occurrence frequency" is, for example, the small hit occurrence rate per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, for example.
The rate of small hits per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. 5
By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming for a prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in a special winning opening during a non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. Select the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of fluctuations since then. in this case,
When executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the low probability shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) / the first KT
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (second start winning opening opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit, is opened. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 052IW, as already described, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the variation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG.
The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in -8 (E) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, the 2nd variation pattern # 07 to # 13 It will be decided by either. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when it is determined that the second to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of order,
It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second. On the other hand, low probability / 1st K
When it is determined that the second to 49th variation of the T state is out of alignment, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 09 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 11 of the shortened fluctuation. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state,
It may be determined by the second variation pattern # 12 with reach. Second fluctuation pattern # 07
, # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored.
The second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reserved storages are stored. As a result, it is configured to accelerate the digestion of the reserved memory and increase the operating rate. Further, when the big hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, the 2nd variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), the second is the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state.
When the variation display of the special symbol is executed, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16.

In the feature unit 052IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the image display device 5. Figure 10-
As shown in 8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" It is determined to be the second variation pattern # 14 or the second variation pattern # 15 accompanied by the display. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "Chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. It is determined to be the second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is used. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set as a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profits from.
Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 052IW, even if the change of the second special symbol is started during the big hit change of the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the gaming machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot during the KT state. May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed. Select the variation pattern table according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) is selected and varied. The pattern is determined. Figure 10-
As shown in 9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. To.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, high probability / 1st KT
The second fluctuation pattern # 18 with reach even when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the state is out of order.
May be decided. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, FIG. 10
As shown in -9 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, the high shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is executed. Probability / The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), 2 in the high probability / first KT state.
When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the variation, the second variation pattern # 2
It is determined to be one of 2 to # 28.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H). It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation having a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation having a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second. On the other hand, high probability / 1st KT state 2
When it is determined that the variation is out of range after the variation, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the fluctuation time of 1
It may be determined by the second variation pattern # 26 of the shortened variation of seconds and even shorter. On the other hand, when it is determined that a small hit is made after the second fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, the second with reach is accompanied.
It may be determined by the fluctuation pattern # 27. The second fluctuation patterns # 22 and # 25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold storages. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, it is configured to accelerate the digestion of the reserved memory and increase the operating rate. again,
When the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / second KT state, FIG. 1
The variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in 0-9 (I) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation patterns # 29 to #
It is determined to be one of 34.

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, lottery processing is performed based on the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern.
Which fluctuation pattern should be used is determined. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display which is a small hit is executed, the variation display is executed. , Regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, the variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed with a high probability in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute a shortened variation of 5 seconds or 1 second in the low probability state and execute a shortened variation of 1.5 seconds in the high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, FIG. 10-11 (
Using 1), the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “probability variation jackpot”) will be described. do. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is in the open state. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), the first
When the winning of the second game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the round, the solenoid 052I
W109 is driven, the V area opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V area 052
A game ball can enter IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings to the large winning openings are detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

A game ball enters the V area 052IW104, and the V area switch 0 is within a predetermined detection valid period.
When detected by 52IW106, the game state is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is started. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses after the control to the closed state again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled to a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal jackpot”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is in the open state. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), the first
When the winning of the first game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the round, the solenoid 052I
W109 is driven, and the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 has an extremely short period (in this example, 0.
It is controlled to open (02 seconds). Then, in the first round, a predetermined period (for example, 29)
When the number of winnings in a predetermined number (for example, 10) has passed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) have been won, FIG. 10-
As shown in 11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again.
The big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is an extremely short opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 (0.02 in this example).
After (seconds), it is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the V region 052 during the predetermined detection valid period.
The game ball easily enters the IW104, and is easily controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game is completed.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on the probabilistic jackpot, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game as compared with the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIGS. 10-12 show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Further, FIG. 10-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. again,
FIG. 10-14 shows the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 1 in the case of a small hit C.
The opening pattern of 7 is shown. Further, FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIGS. 10-12 (2) show. 10-14 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). FIG. 10
As shown in -12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbol. When the variable display is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the deviation symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. .. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.2 seconds, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG. 10-12
As shown in (1) to FIG. 10-14 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed and the time before the second start winning opening opening process has elapsed 0.1 seconds, the variable winning ball The device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , In the case of small hit B, FIG. 10-13
As shown in (1), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and has a small hit C, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), the special variable winning ball Device 17 is 1
.. It is opened for 8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds. You can hardly expect a prize). However, in the first KT state, FIG. 10-12 (1)
), While the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side The time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. be. Therefore, this feature portion 05
In the 2IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to the time when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). FIG. 10
As shown in -12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbol. When the variable display is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the deviation symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. .. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG. 10-12
As shown in (2) to FIG. 10-14 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed and the time before the second start winning opening opening process has elapsed 2.6 seconds, the variable winning ball The device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , In the case of small hit B, FIG. 10-13
As shown in (2), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and has a small hit C, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), the special variable winning ball Device 17 is 1
.. It is opened for 8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in this feature unit 052IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6
The interval period (closing period) after opening B is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds + time before the second start winning opening opening process 2.6 seconds. ) Is secured for a relatively long period of time. Therefore, in the second KT state, FIG. 10-12 (2)
As shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), since the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, the special variable winning on the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the ball device 17, and it is easy for the game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening. However,
In the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the special winning opening even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit R".
Character display such as "USH" is displayed.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is different depending on which of the small hit types A to C is used. I can't be limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be different depending on which of the small hit types A to C is used. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) can be opened by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize, and various aspects can be considered. Also, in this example, the small hit type is small hit A to
Although the case where there are three types of C is shown, the case is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, four or more types of small hit types may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to the time when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, a variable display of a normal symbol can be executed or a variable winning ball device 6 can be executed.
The process of controlling the opening of B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the game control microcomputer 100).
It is performed by executing the normal symbol process process (see step S26) by the CPU 103). Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In this feature unit 052IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for 0.2 seconds each in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. By making it different, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, and FIGS. 10-12 (1) to FIGS. As shown in 10-14 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. It is controlled so that the time is shortened.

In addition, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIG. 10-12 (1).
)-The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) in which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIG. 10-12 (2).
The variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 10-14 (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) in which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, low probability / 1st KT
Of the 50 shortened fluctuation periods of the special symbol in the state, the above-mentioned special flag may be cleared in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, low probability /
After the end of the first KT state, when the left-handed hit notification is performed, it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the variable winning ball device 6B being long open.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortened variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible not to win the variable winning ball device 6B, and the probability is low / non-KT.
It is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during the state.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol at the timing of stopping the fluctuation (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 052IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, command 80
00 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are effect control commands for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Variation pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, the effect control CPU
120 is a command 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H).
Upon receiving any of the above, the image display device 5 is controlled to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is out of alignment. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 10R probability variation jackpot. .. Command 9003 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command.
This is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the R probability variation jackpot. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9005 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command by 2.
This is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the R probability variation jackpot. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 052IW, the game control microcomputer 1
Since 00 sends a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is the first.
Since it can be determined that it is a display result specification command for a special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result specification command for the second special symbol, it can be determined that it is a display result specification command. Can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result specification command for the first special symbol and the display result specification command for the second special symbol may be separated.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 has ended. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the end of the jackpot game (
Big hit end specification command: ending specification command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005
(H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that the start prize has been given.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is in the first customer waiting state (the first special symbol has not been changed, and the command D000 (H) has not been changed.
This is an effect control command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the first hold storage is not stored). Command D001 (H) is in the second customer waiting state (second).
This is an effect control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the special symbol has not been changed and the second hold storage is not stored). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (
H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first) that specifies the background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state.
KT background specification command). Command E003 (H) has a high probability of playing / 2nd K
This is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display in the T state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command that specifies the currently set value (
Setting value command). A set value is set in "XX". For example, the set value "1"
If set to, command E101 (H) is transmitted as a set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 is a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11.
When the above-mentioned effect control command is received from, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16, and the display state of the lamp is changed to change the sound control board 13. The sound number data is output to. It should be noted that FIGS. 10-15 and 10 are shown.
An effect control command other than the effect control command shown in -16 is also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is
This is the case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A. When the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A,
In the first special symbol display device 4A, the variation display of the first special symbol is not made.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (the value of the first reserved storage number).
Step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is used for effect control C.
It is transmitted to PU120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 has RAM 1.
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of 02 is read out and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 052IWS53A), and the first reserved storage. Decrease the number value by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st reserved storage counter by 1) and shift the contents of each storage area (step 052IW).
S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is always extracted is the first reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, 4 are in order. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are used. The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052I).
WS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. In some cases, the low probability / 1st KT state is determined and the low probability / 1st KT background specification command is issued.
When the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is high probability / first KT, and the high probability / first KT background specification command is executed. When the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off. Is determined to be in the high probability / second KT state, and a high probability / second KT background designation command is transmitted to.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is a big hit is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, step 052I without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A.
Move to WS69A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and step 052IWS59A
By shifting to, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for hit determination was acquired at the time of starting winning.

Further, for example, when the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the jackpot of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads a random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A).
), The jackpot determination module is executed (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a hit determination random number is a jackpot if it matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS6).
4A). In the small hit judgment module, the random number for hit judgment (may be a random number for small hit judgment) is
It is a program that decides to make a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS65A). Step 052IWS66A). again,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 052IW).
S68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). And step 052IWS
Move to 69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A).
, "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052I).
WS70A), it is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 1
00 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052).
Together with IWS72A), the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol is being performed is reset (step 052IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this feature unit 052IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / It is a case where it is controlled to a high base state (low probability / first KT state) and the variation display is executed 50 times. Low probability / high base state (low probability / 1st KT)
In the case of (state), step 052IWS7 when starting the 50th fluctuation display.
It is determined as Y in 1A and S71B, the high base flag is reset in steps 052IWS72A and S72B, and the special time reduction flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B. ).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation shortening common to the first KT state. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while making it a state.

In this example, the process of step 052IWS74A and step 052IWS described later will be described.
By executing the process of 74B, the final fluctuation in the high base state due to the start of fluctuation of either the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display). When is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (50 in this example).
The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset according to the end of the variation display (the fifth variation display) or the start of the variation display (in this example, the 51st variation display) of the other special symbol, and the variation shortening state. It is desirable to configure it so that the extension of is completed.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 052IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the second special symbol variation display by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (FIG. 10-7). (Refer to FIG. 10-9), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 10
0 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 052IW).
S1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state)
, The game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is described in step 052IWS1701A,
Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is used based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in S1702A and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. (Step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (
Step 052IWS1704A).

Further, in step 052IWS1703A, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol
When the determination is made, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and starts the measurement of the fluctuation time (step 052IWS1705A), and the first special symbol display device. The variation display of the first special symbol in 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. CPU10 in the first special symbol variation processing
3. First, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121).
)-The value does not indicate the small hit end process (step S128), and even during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) during the small hit game (special variable winning ball device 17).
Is not open).

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted.
And, based on the decision result of the jackpot type, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command, display result 2 specified command, display result 3 specified command, display result 4 specified command, display result 7 specified command) is produced. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS11).
22A), when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A)
), Control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052).
IWS1130A).

If the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052I).
WS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. The second indicating that it will be a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol.
It can be determined by checking whether or not the jackpot flag is set.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.
If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 0).
52IWS1127A). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS)
1125A Y) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 052IWS112)
When the variation display of the first special symbol which is Y) of 6A and is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed (step 0).
52IWS1127A Y, step 052IWS1128A N), CPU103
Controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS113).
0A).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is executed. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129A. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the second
Based on the fact that the variation display of the special symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120A, the processing of steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probable variable jackpot, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a miss or a small hit is performed. Even if there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
PU103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS).
2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (
In addition to step 052IWS2012A), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performs the right-handed operation. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, low probability / 1st K
The right-handed display 26 is lit during the T state, but steps 052IWS69A to S
By executing the processes of 74A and S69B to S74B, when the 50th variation display is started, the low probability / first KT state is terminated and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered, and steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A are executed. , S2010B to S2013B are executed, so that the right-handed display 26 is turned off when the 50th variation display is completed.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, CPU1
03 sets the jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot is started (step 052I).
WS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 0).
52IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 0).
52IWS2018A), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

Step 052 By executing the processing of IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a big hit is made in the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. It may be configured to start lighting the display 26.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, C for effect control
Control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the PU 120 (step 052IW).
S2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 05).
2IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. but,
As already explained, when a small hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only the small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed display 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right-handed notification that urges the player to launch a game ball to the right of the game area. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. May be.

In addition, right-handed notification and launch promotion notification are not executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, and right-handed notification and launch promotion notification are performed when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening in that state. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the change display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first hold memory is used). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification urging the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. For players who intentionally perform right-handed operations,
It may be configured to perform left-handed notification according to a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the gaming machine is high.
With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of game balls detected at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. Also, the passage gate 4
In 1, when a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and in the second start winning opening and the special winning opening, a specific number less than the predetermined number. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when (for example, one) or more game balls are detected.

In this feature unit 052IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (the value of the second reserved storage number).
Step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is used for effect control C.
It is transmitted to PU120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 has RAM 1.
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of 02 is read out and stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 052IWS53B), and the second reserved storage. Decrease the number value by 1 (subtract the count value of the 2nd hold storage counter by 1) and shift the contents of each storage area (step 052IW).
S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is always extracted is always the second reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, 4 are in order. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052I).
WS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background specification command is as follows in step 052IWS of the first special symbol normal processing.
It is the same as the process shown in 56A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, step 052I without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B.
Move to WS69B. As a result, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 052IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the jackpot of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads a random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B).
), The jackpot determination module is executed (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a hit determination random number is a jackpot if it matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). .. Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS6).
3B), the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS6).
4B). In the small hit judgment module, the random number for hit judgment (may be a random number for small hit judgment) is
It is a program that decides to make a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS65B). Step 052IWS66B). again,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 052IW).
S68B). In this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, in the game control microcomputer 100, the value of the high base number counter is "0".
(Step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052IWS70B). It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). The value of the high base count counter is "0"
If not, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIGS. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first steps 0.
Perform the same processing as the 52IWS1700A, and confirm whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state)
, The game control microcomputer 100 selects the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 varies depending on whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of variations. As a variation pattern table for determining a pattern, the second one for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I).
Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is shown in FIG. 10-8 (D).
) Is selected for the second special symbol variation pattern table, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, FIG. 10
The second special symbol variation pattern table shown in -8 (E) is selected, and if it is the 50th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected. Also, for example
If both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, select the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (G). Then, if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not been transmitted yet.
And, based on the determination result of the jackpot type, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command, display result 2 specified command, display result 3 specified command, display result 5 specified command, display result 6 specified command, display result 7 Designated command) is output control CPU120
(Step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS11).
22B), when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B)
), Control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

If the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052I).
WS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. The first indicating that it will be a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol.
It can be determined by checking whether or not the jackpot flag is set.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.
If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is terminated as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 0).
52IWS1127B). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probable big hit, a 6R probable big hit, or a 2R probable big hit (step 052IWS1128B). .. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63B. 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot,
Or, if it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process is terminated as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS)
1125B Y) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 052IWS112)
When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127B), which is Y) of 6B and does not become any of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot). , Step 052IWS1128B N)
The CPU 103 controls the effect control CPU 120 to send a second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).
).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is executed. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the change display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, Or, if the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the 2R probability variation jackpot) is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol is executed. Based on the fact that the fluctuation display of the symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126).
Move to a small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 052IWS1
When it is determined to be N at 120B, the processing of steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second fluctuation time timer of step 052IWS1122B is not updated.
Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probable variable jackpot, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is again changed to the bonus control normal process (step S12).
It is updated to the value corresponding to 0), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a miss or a small hit is performed. Even if there is, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the reduced working hours state), the remaining second reserved memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing in which the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol is provided on the right side of the game area (the winning ball device for the second special symbol (1st starting winning opening). A start winning opening that is not a variable winning ball device) is provided, and the second KT state (small hit RUSH)
In the gaming machine configured to shift to the normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied as described above. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of big hits at unintended timings when the player is absent. Can be done.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
PU103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS).
2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (
In addition to step 052IWS2012B), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, CPU1
03 sets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Also, C
PU103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 0).
52IWS2018B) and control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

Step 052 By executing the processing of IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, C for effect control
Control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the PU 120 (step 052IW).
S2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 05).
2IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special time reduction flag is not set (that is,
(If it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2024B), and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2024B). 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, step 052IWS20
Move to 27B.

Step 052 By executing the processing of IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening)
Is provided on the right side of the game area, so that it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if it is a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, K
If it is in the T state, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be lit. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 052IWS2023B, the second step is performed during the KT state.
When a small hit occurs in the variable display of the special symbol, the process of starting the lighting of the right-handed display 26 or transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed in duplicate.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 shows the accessory control normal process (step S120) in the accessory control process process.
) Is a flowchart showing. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101).
.. If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 052IWS2103), sets open pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 052IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 10-25 shows a gate passage waiting process (step S12) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 1). In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052IWS25).
01). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Then CPU10
3 sends a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503) and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 052IWS2).
504).

In this feature unit 052IW, by executing the gate passage waiting process, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol, but the game is played through the passage gate 41. It is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 shows the jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process.
) Is a flowchart showing. In the process of opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 052IWS24).
01). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 has a winning number for counting the number of the game balls that have won the big prize opening. The value of the counter is added by 1 (step 052IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. Check whether or not (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406)
, Or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408)
The CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door to control the big winning opening to the closed state (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0).
52IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (
Step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-processing after opening the jackpot (step 052IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 10-27 shows the jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows. In the big hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 determines the time during which the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 on the jackpot end display timer (big hit end display time).
A value corresponding to the display time corresponding to (step 052IWS2201) is set, and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 0).
52IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU
103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2).
204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the probability change flag, and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 05).
2IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. In addition, 10R
In the case of a probabilistic jackpot or a 2R probabilistic jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / low base state (high probability / first). It will be controlled to 2KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS).
2209). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, CPU10
3 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS221).
0), and further set the special figure time reduction flag to shift to the KT state (step 052IWS2).
211). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, if the gaming ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, the high base number counter is not set only by setting the high base flag. In this case, the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (step 052IWS25 of the gate passage waiting process).
(See 02), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. Step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052I of the second special symbol normal processing
Step 052IWS70A or step 052IWS70B is determined to be Y by WS69B.
The subtraction process of the high base count counter is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a high base flag and shifts to a high base state (step 052IWS2212), and sets a special time saving flag. To the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50".
"(Step 052IWS2214). Then, step 052IWS22
Move to 15. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2215).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-28 shows the small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 determines the time during which the small hit end display is displayed on the image display device 5 on the small hit end display timer (small hit end display time).
A value corresponding to the display time corresponding to (step 052IWS2301) is set, and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 0).
52IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2303), the CPU
103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS).
2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed display 26 is lit (step 05).
2IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed display 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (step 052IWS2).
(Refer to 023B to S2025B), the processing of steps 052IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 ends at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW will be described. Figure 10-2
9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW. First, in this feature unit 052IW, a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).
In), the player performs a launch operation (left-handed) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIGS. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game is completed. It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 052IWS2204 to S2).
208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, 6R in a low probability / low base state.
When a probabilistic jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next High probability / high base state is maintained until a jackpot occurs (step 052I)
WS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, V during the jackpot game
If the game ball does not enter the area 052IW104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature portion 052IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the firing operation (right-handed) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIGS. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the V region 05 is performed during the jackpot game.
If a game ball enters 2IW104, a high probability / low base state (high probability / low base state) after the end of the big hit game.
It shifts to the high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / High probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 052IWS2204)
(See S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the jackpot game, V area 052I
If the game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. Also, high probability /
When a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot is The low probability / high base state is maintained until it occurs or the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIGS. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the V region 05 is performed during the jackpot game.
If a game ball enters 2IW104, a high probability / low base state (high probability / low base state) after the end of the big hit game.
It shifts to the high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability after the jackpot game ends. / High probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 052IWS2204)
(See S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the jackpot game, V area 052I
If the game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the game shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, this feature part 052I
In W, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 3
Since it is 5% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed without the next big hit after the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit occurs and the low probability / high base state is reached, FIG. 10-29 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (steps 052IWS69A to S73).
See A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the V region 05 is performed during the jackpot game.
If a game ball enters 2IW104, a high probability / low base state (high probability / low base state) after the end of the big hit game.
It shifts to the high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 15 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. again,
When a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / high probability after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 052IWS2204 to S2206).
, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the game shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the first
Although the case where the variable display of the special symbol is executed has been described, there is a possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed at a low rate. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game,
It will shift to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the gaming ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, 2R
When a normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high base state changes until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. Will be maintained.

Further, in FIGS. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (
It will shift to high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the gaming ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIGS. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (
It will shift to high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the gaming ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIGS. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (
It will shift to high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the gaming ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the game shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Ordinary symbol process processing)
Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 10
When 0 (specifically, CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 052IWS5111), the gate passage designation command is issued to the effect control CPU 120. Controls transmission (step 052)
IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 performs a gate switch passing process (step 052).
IWS5113) is executed.

In the feature unit 052IW, when the process of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113 is executed and the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this feature unit 052IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Regardless of whether or not, the gate passage specification command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 performs step 052IWS according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.
One of the processes shown in 5100 to S5104 is executed.

In this feature unit 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passing process of step 052IWS5113 is executed regardless of whether or not the gate is waiting for passage. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when the gate is not in the waiting state for passing through the gate, and the normal symbol is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the waiting state for passing through the gate. It may be configured not to execute the variable display of.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, the passing gate 41 is normally used as a gate for both the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Design process processing (see step S26)
Since it is executed before, the passage detection process of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal starting area is performed after the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operating region is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passing process (step 052IWS5113): The CPU 103 is a gate passing storage counter (a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passing gate 41).
It is confirmed whether or not the count value (the number of stored gates) has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1.
The LED of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): The CPU 103 can start the fluctuation of the normal symbol (for example, the value of the normal symbol process flag is step 052I).
When the value indicates WS5100, specifically, it is variable based on the fact that the normal symbol display 20 does not display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the normal symbol display 20 hits and the symbol is derived and displayed. (When the winning ball device 6B is not in the opening / closing operation), the value of the gate passing memory number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed.
If the number of stored gates is not 0, it is determined whether or not to make a hit (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 052IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).
Is updated to a value indicating (specifically, "0"). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is processed before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052).
Update to a value (specifically, "3") indicating IWS5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric accessory operation time in the normal symbol process timer and sets the timer. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing storage number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (step 052IWS)
Y) of 5121, the process is terminated as it is. If the gate-passing storage number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing storage number = 1 (step 052IWS512).
2). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passing storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random symbols for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of gate-passing storages are always extracted is the order of the number of gate-passing storages = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number value for determining whether to hit a normal symbol) to determine whether or not to hit a normal symbol. (Step 052IWS5127). In addition, this feature part 0
In 52IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99 regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state, the KT state, or the high base state.
It is decided to make it a normal symbol with a probability of / 100.

In step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is within the hit range (when it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as a display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (when it is out of the range), the CPU 103 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol process timer (.
Step 052 Y, S5131 of IWS5130). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second as the normal symbol fluctuation time is set in the normal symbol process timer (N, in step 052IWS5130).
S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (in step 052IWS5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step 052IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100) (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, it is set. That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3706). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 0).
52IWS3707).

(Ordinary electric accessory pre-opening treatment)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3802),
The process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , That is, when it is in the first KT state, the normal electric accessory opening time is 5.
Set 5 seconds in the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3805). again,
When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

As described above, in the feature unit 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning prize in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the feature unit 052IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). It may be controlled so that the number of times of opening of 6B is set to 1 time, whereas the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is set to 2 times in the first KT state). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, and the variable winning ball device 6B It may be executed in combination with a control that increases the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step 052).
IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 05).
2IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the receive command is stored in the command receive buffer, the effect control CP
U120 reads the received command from the command receive buffer (step 052IWS).
612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 052IWS).
613). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 052IWS614)
, The effect control CPU 0120 sets the set value indicated by the received set value command to RAM1.
It is stored in the set value storage area formed in 22 (step 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 052IWS6)
16) The effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617).
). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS61).
8).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 052IWS6)
19) The effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620).
).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command, second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) (step 052IWS621). ), The effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 0).
52IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS)
623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). In addition, the effect control CPU 1
20 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).
).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end specification command (step 052IWS)
626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). In addition, the effect control CPU 1
20 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).
).

In this example, by executing the process of steps 052IWS624 and S627, the right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, the display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the big hit game, the setting value suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, the right-handed display of the white display color is normally started, but when it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, the set value "1" is set. If is, the right-handed display of the blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and if the setting value is "2", the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , When the setting value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the right of the orange display color is relatively high. When the setting value is "5", the right-handed display of the red display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "6", the right-handed display is started at a relatively high rate. Right-handed display of the rainbow-colored display color may be started.

Further, for example, it is configured to continuously execute the right-handed display even during the KT state after the big hit game ends, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed at the timing of the end of the big hit game. It may be configured to perform a value suggestion effect.

Further, for example, in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed and the normal state (
When shifting to the low probability / low base state), the left-handed display is configured to start, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the left-handed display is changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. It may be configured. When the control of the gaming state is switched in such a form, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start specification command (step 052IWS)
629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end specification command (step 052IWS)
631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a display command while the winning opening is open (step 052I)
WS633), the effect control CPU 120 resets (clears to 0) the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening during the round of the big hit game (clear to 0).
Step 052IWS634). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the big winning opening opening flag that specifies that the big winning opening is being opened (the round period during the big hit game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening opening display command (timing to start the round), which is extremely rare. Even if an over-winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received production control command is a display command after opening the big winning opening (step 052I)
WS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening, which specifies that it is an interval period after opening the large winning opening (step 052IWS637).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start specification command (step 052I)
WS638), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end specification command (step 052I)
WS640), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy / non-KT background specification command (step 052)
IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a blue background image) according to the low probability / non-KT state (step 052IWS643). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 052IWS).
644). Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a prize for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state. If the ball number counter is set, the value of the prize ball number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, a game ball wins in the big winning opening during a big hit game (except during a big hit game based on a 2R probability variable big hit or a 2R normal big hit), or a game is played in a special winning opening during a high probability / second KT state. When a ball wins a prize, the value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated (see step 052IWS660, S667), but the processing of step 052IWS645 is executed, so that the gaming state has a low probability / High base state (low probability / first KT state)
The value of the prize ball counter is cleared to 0 when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed and the low probability / low base state is reached.

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background specification command (step 05)
2IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a green background image) according to the low probability / first KT state (for example).
Step 052IWS647). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if it is set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background specification command (step 05)
2IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a yellow background image) according to the high probability / first KT state (for example).
Step 052IWS651). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background specification command (step 05)
2IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a red background image) according to the high probability / second KT state (for example).
Step 052IWS655). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 052IWS657).

If the received production control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step 052IW)
S658), the effect control CPU 120 is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6
R Check if you are in a big hit game based on a normal big hit (step 052IWS6)
59). Whether or not the game is in the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, the effect control process flag value during the jackpot effect process (
It is confirmed whether or not the value indicates the ending effect processing (step S177) from step S176), and the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 2 designation command to the display result 4. It can be determined by checking whether it is a specified command.

During a big hit game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 0).
52IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052I).
WS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS658 to S661, in this example,
The value of the prize ball counter and the prize ball number display are updated based on the fact that a prize is won in the big prize opening during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot. On the other hand, even during the big hit game, if a prize is won in the big prize opening during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variable big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated and the prize ball. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS662). note that,
The "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when the over-winning to the large winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). In addition, in the "Prize ball number display suggestion effect", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is predetermined. Number (456 in this example, 5
It is an effect that is executed at the timing when the number reaches 55, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS664). In addition, in the "Prize ball number emphasis production", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is a predetermined number. (In this example, 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces,
It is a production that highlights the fact that the number has reached 3000, 4000, and 5000).

If the received production control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052I)
WS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability / second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS667). Also, CP for production control
The U120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS668).

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS665 to S668, in this example,
The value of the prize ball counter and the prize ball number display are updated based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is won in the special winning opening. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, only the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small hit winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS669). It should be noted that the "small hit winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is awarded to the special winning opening, and suggests the currently set value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 052IWS663 and executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU
120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 052IWS664).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 may be used.
A process of storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command is executed (step 052IWS670). And step 05
Move to 2IWS611.

(Suggestion production processing at the time of over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS662) at the time of over winning. CPU 120 for effect control in the suggestion effect process at the time of over winning
First, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 1
20 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect, and determines the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect (step). 052IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of over winning.
As shown in FIGS. 10-39, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggestion effect, over-winning suggestion effect A, over-winning suggestion effect B, over-winning suggestion effect C, and over-winning time. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect D, the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning, and the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning.

As shown in FIGS. 10-39, in this example, when the game ball wins in the large winning opening, the winning display (in this example, “+15”) is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-39, when the "over-winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the sound B different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the sound D different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the sound E different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIGS. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over-winning suggestion effect determination table depending on whether the current set value is any of the set values "1" to "6". In step 052IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect are determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIGS. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio at which the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect D is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect E is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect F is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over-winning suggestion effects A to F, is 10
% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, and 45% when the set value is "2".
When the set value is "3", it is 50%, and when the set value is "4", it is 55%.
When the set value is "5", it is 60%, and when the set value is "6", it is 65%.
Is. As described above, in this example, since the over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high as compared with the small hit-winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS303 (step 052IWS304). If it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect ().
Step 052IWS305). For example, if it is determined to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in the blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052IWS302).
, Or when it is decided that there is no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (N in step 052IWS304)
), The effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display in a normal display color (white in this example) (step 052IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestion production processing at the time of small hit prize)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS669) at the time of a small hit winning. In the small hit winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
First, a lottery process is performed based on a random number using the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the presence / absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion effect are determined. (Step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of small hit winning. As shown in FIGS. 10-41, in the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestion effect, small hit winning suggestion effect A, small hit winning suggestion effect B, and small hit winning suggestion effect. C,
Judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect D, the small hit winning suggestion effect E, and the small hit winning suggestion effect F, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 10-41, in this example, when the game ball wins in the special winning opening, the winning display (in this example, "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. "
(Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-41, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker is displayed. A winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the sound B different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed.
, 8R outputs a winning sound of sound D different from the normal sound. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the sound E different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIGS. 10-41, different determination values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on whether the current set value is the set value "1" to "6". .. In step 052IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 uses the set value storage area (step 0).
52 Check the stored contents of IWS615) and specify the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIGS. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect C is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect D is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect E is relatively high. Further, in this example, the set value "6"
In the case of, the ratio at which the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of winning a small hit is determined is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio for determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the small hit winning suggestion effects A to F. Is 2% + 1
% + 1% + 1% = 5%, 6% when the set value is "2", 7% when the set value is "3", and 7% when the set value is "4". Is 8%, 9% when the set value is "5", and 10% when the set value is "6". As described above, in this example, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is relatively low as compared with the over-winning suggestion effect already described.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS321 (step 052IWS322). If it is determined to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggested effect (step). 052IWS323). For example, if it is determined to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in the blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is decided that there is no suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit (N in step 052IWS322).
In the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 has a normal display color (in this example, the display color is normal.
Control to display the winning display in white) (step 052IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ().
Step 052IWS326).

It should be noted that the reliability of the set value suggestion may be different depending on whether the suggestion effect at the time of over winning is executed or the suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6", whereas it is a small hit. If the suggestion effect F at the time of winning is executed, the set value "6"
It may be configured to be determined to be. On the contrary, for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect F can be executed by any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6". On the other hand, if the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is executed, the set value "6" may be determined.

Further, in this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit-winning suggestion effect make the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) different from the usual one, and output a winning sound different from the usual one. The case where it is carried out by an embodiment is shown, but it is not limited to such an embodiment. for example,
By making only one of the winning display display mode (display color in this example) and the winning sound different from the normal mode, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit-winning suggestion effect can be executed. It may be configured. In addition, for example, by displaying the effect display at the timing of the occurrence of over-winning or the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening, or by changing the display color of the lamp or LED, a suggestion effect at the time of over-winning or a small hit winning is achieved. It may be configured to perform a time suggestion effect.

(Prize ball number display suggestion production processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 first (step 052IW).
S341). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15 in steps 052IWS3.
In 41, if the value of the prize ball counter is 465, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 052IWS342).
.. Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and draws a lot based on random numbers. Processing is performed to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 052IWS343).
Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. Figure 1
As shown in 0-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A
Is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more, so the prize ball number display suggestion effect A
Is executed, it is confirmed that the set value is at least "4" or more.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 for the first time (step 052IWS)
N) of 341, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS344, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 052IWS345).
.. Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect B. (Step 052IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed,
A character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, 2
The execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is determined with a probability of%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that it is more than that.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 for the first time (step 052IWS)
N) of 344, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS347, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed,
A character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "6". As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 for the first time (step 052IWS)
N) of 347, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (step 052IWS350). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is added by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS350, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the prize ball number counter value is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120 will be pressed.
Check whether the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 052IWS351)
). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect D. (Step 052IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed,
A character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example,
The execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 for the first time (step 052IW)
N) of S350, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (step 052IWS353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so that in step 052IWS353, the effect control CPU 120
If the value of the prize ball counter is 2555 or 2560, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 will be pressed.
Check whether the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 052IWS354).
). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect E. (Step 052IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed,
A character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example,
The execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 for the first time (step 052IW)
N) of S353, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first (step 052IWS356). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so that in step 052IWS356, the effect control CPU 120
If the value of the prize ball counter is 2670 or 2675, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 will be pressed.
It is confirmed whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS357).
Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. decide(
Step 052IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed,
A character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "6". As shown in FIGS. 10-43, 2% in this example.
The execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with the probability of. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value "6", so that the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed.
Is executed, it is confirmed that the set value is "6".

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is set in steps 052IWS343, S346, S34.
It is confirmed whether or not the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is decided in 9, S352, S355, and S358 (step 052IWS359). If the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS360). For example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A
If it is determined to execute the above, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "456 OVER".

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed, the set value "5" or more is confirmed, and the set value " 6 ”The accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set values is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, when viewed in the prize ball number display suggestion effects D to F executed during the period during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the small hit RUSH is in progress. As the period of the prize balls increases and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed and the set value. "5
The accuracy of confirming the above, and confirming the set value "6" and suggesting the set value is increasing.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the set value may decrease.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the small hit RUSH period. Direction DF
Although the case where the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is different is shown, the present invention may be configured to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect with the same execution probability.

(Prize ball number emphasis production processing)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 052IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasis effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the value of the prize ball number counter to a threshold value of every 1000 (1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 in this example).
It is confirmed whether or not the first arrival at 5000) is reached (step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS371, the effect is controlled. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, the value of the prize ball counter is 200.
It is determined that 0 is reached first. Also, for example, the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3.
If it is 005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches the threshold value for every 1000 first, the effect control CPU 1
20 uses a prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number emphasizing effect.
A lottery process based on random numbers is performed to determine whether or not to emphasize the number of prize balls (step 052IW).
S372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. Figure 10-
As shown in 45, in this example, when the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000,
There is a 50% chance that the prize ball number emphasis effect A will be executed. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5.
Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, "40" is performed on the image display device 5.
A character display such as "00 OVER" is displayed. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, the image display device 5 has "5000 OVE".
A character display such as "R" is displayed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect is determined in step 052IWS372 (step 052IWS373). If the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 displays "1000 O".
Controls the display of characters such as "VER".

In this example, when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, not only when the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed in all of these cases, the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, and 3000. It may be configured. Also, for example, the number of prize balls is 600.
Even when the number of prize balls reaches 0 or 7000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be feasible, and various aspects can be considered.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 and 10-45, the prize ball number emphasizing effect is different from the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43, and is irrelevant to the current set value. It is a production that is decided and executed. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize ball number emphasizing effect, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be executed in a mode suggesting the current set value. For example, "1000 OVER" or "" with an unusual display color.
By displaying a character display such as "2000 OVER", the current set value may be configured to be suggestive.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (step 052IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). And step 052IWS811
Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052I).
WS812). If neither the 1st KT state flag nor the 2nd KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 052IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 12
0 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (ie,
(If it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (that is,
(If the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in the feature unit 052IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and the KT state is executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or
Even when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not executed in the non-KT state.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (step 052IWS920). Whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area designating the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it exists. When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit (step 052IWS921). Whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit is checked, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. It can be determined by this. If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach off symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

As described above, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, there is only a case where the small hit is A, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. You can hardly expect to win a prize. Therefore, in this example, when the process of steps 052IWS920 to S922 is executed and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained,
By forcibly stopping and displaying the non-reach out-of-reach symbol, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (N of step 052IWS920) or when the small hit variation is not performed (N of step 052IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 is the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. (Step 052IWS923)
.. In step 052IWS923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designated command (when it is determined to be out of order), only the outlier symbol or the left and right ornamental symbols whose left, middle, and right decorative symbols are completely inconsistent are received. Determine the combination of matching out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols aligned with the symbol "7" among the odd-numbered symbols on the left, middle, and right is determined. Further, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. Further, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols including the special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. .. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are even-numbered. To decide. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is out of order (step 052IWS924). To check whether the variable display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 specification command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 052IWS928 as it is. If the fluctuation is out of alignment (Y in step 052IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to set. Determine the presence / absence and type of value suggestion effect.

10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the set value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-48, there is no set value suggestion effect in the set value suggestion effect determination table.
Judgment values are assigned to the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect B, the set value suggestion effect C, the set value suggestion effect D, the set value suggestion effect E, and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The set value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “1” is used. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “2”. The execution rate is the highest when it is.
Further, the set value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “3”. The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value "4". ], The execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, for example, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “5”. The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect F is, for example,
It is an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the execution rate is the highest when the set value is "6". ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 052IWS928 as it is. If the second KT status flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926),
That is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 is in the second KT state (small hit R).
USH) executes a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 052IWS92).
7).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-49, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and small hit R.
A determination value is assigned to each of the USH continuation suggestion effect B. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-49, in this example, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the set value is "2". The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "3", and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and when the set value is "5", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is even higher, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-49, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is when the set value is "6".
Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1" and the jackpot probability is the highest when the set value is "6". Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is high), and the setting value "6" is used. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low).
Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the second
It is possible to increase the expectation that the KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be long without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Therefore, especially when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed. It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, the set value suggestion effect, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. For setting value suggestion production and small hit RUSH
The process table according to the continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 052IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speaker 8L) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1).
, 8R) (step 052IWS930). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. In addition, the speaker 8L,
A control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13 in order to output the voice from the 8R.

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the deviation fluctuation).

If it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS
By executing step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in 928, the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the out-of-order fluctuation in the second KT state). ), The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decoration symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decoration symbol fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 052IWS932).

(Variable display effect processing)
FIG. 10-50 shows the effect processing during variable display (step S17) in the effect control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 2). In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 12
For 0, first, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS8101).
), The value of the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first). 1 Confirm whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control C
The PU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 052IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 is
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2 Confirm whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).
).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8112). If the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 052IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 is
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not received in step 052IWS8108, or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not received in step 052IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. Checks if has timed out (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as described above, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probable variable big hit, is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probable variable big hit, is being executed, the small hit game is in progress. , The update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol variation time timer timed out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that
In this case, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the process of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is swayed or slightly changed in the image display device 5 to be in a temporary stop state.

In the image display device 5, for example, when the variable display of the system small symbol, the fourth symbol, or the like is also executed, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols or the fourth symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol are displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped and displayed.

(Waiting processing per special figure)
10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS).
9701). If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, step 052IWS970
Move to 6. When the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the feature unit 052IW, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705.
Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the jackpot middle effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is performed. The process proceeds to step 052IWS9706 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 052IWS9702). Stop symbol display flag 2
If is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9717. This feature part 052I
In W, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, step 052IW
The stop symbol display flag 2 is set in S9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 052IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 uses the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left middle right decorative symbol being stopped displayed in the image display device 5. , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be confirmed and displayed (step 052IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CP is executed in step 052IWS9703.
The U120 controls to confirm and display the out-of-order symbol.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052).
IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). Unless the prize ball number display is being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 has a jackpot type of 10R probability variation jackpot, 6
Check whether it is an R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS9).
709). Whether or not the jackpot type is 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, the received display result specification command being the display result 2 designation command.
Display result 4 Judgment can be made by confirming whether or not the command is a designated command. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 052IWS97).
10).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, the display of the number of prize balls is not started when the big hit game based on the 2R probability variable big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 052IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 052IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component).
) Is executed (step 052IWS9713).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot middle effect process (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N in step 052IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052).
IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 052IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 052IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component).
) Is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N of step 052IWS9704 and N of step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production processing)
10-53 is a flowchart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052).
IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot middle effect process (see step S176).
Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 052IW).
S953), a process of controlling the effect device (image display device 5, game effect lamp 9, speaker 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed according to the content of the process data n (step 052IWS954).
). For example, an effect of displaying the end of a big hit or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052IWS952),
The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined is, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. Can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the display of the prize ball number display (step 052IWS959).

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS958 to S959, in this example,
When a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and the prize ball number display is erased when the jackpot game is completed. The prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state after the end.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS960). Whether or not it is a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 052IWS962).

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS960 to S962, in this example,
When a jackpot game based on a 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, in this example, the prize ball number display is displayed even before the 2R probability variation jackpot. If so, the prize ball number display is continuously displayed, but the display is not updated), and the prize ball number display is displayed during the high probability / second KT state after the big hit game is completed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the effect control process flag value to a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 10-54 (A), the image display device 5
In, when the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3) when the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is reached. The set value suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW001,052IW002,052IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the set value suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1), the image display device 5 is set by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color. The value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2), the image display device 5 has a predetermined character image 052IW00 in a yellow display color.
The set value suggestion effect is executed according to the mode of displaying 2. Further, for example, the setting value suggestion effect E
When the above is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW003 in the red display color on the image display device 5.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-54, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestion effect B is executed. Is displayed with a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the display color of the color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image having a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment and the setting value suggestion effect is executed. You can have a sense of expectation for it.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, the second K
Small hit RUS in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the T state (small hit RUSH)
H It is possible to execute a continuous suggestion effect.

In this example, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), for example, a character display 052IW004 such as "small hit RUSH" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is recognizable that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Then, Fig. 10-5
As shown in 5 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH is configured to display a predetermined effect image 052IW005,052IW006 on the image display device 5.
The continuation suggestion effect is executed. In this example, the predetermined production image 052IW005,052
The case where the image of the racing car is displayed as IW006 is shown. in this case,
For example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), the small hit is displayed by displaying the predetermined effect image 052IW005 in the blue display color on the image display device 5. The RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Also, for example, a small hit RU
When the SH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is displayed by displaying the predetermined effect image 052IW005 in the red display color on the image display device 5. Is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS).
See 2019A, S2019B, S639). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the effect control CPU 120 causes a right-handed display 05 on the display screen of the image display device 5.
2IW007 is displayed (see step 052IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variation display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (step 052IWS2).
See 024B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, FIG. 1
As shown in 0-56 (2), the right-handed notification LED 3 is used by the effect control CPU 120.
7 is lit (see step 052IWS2025B, S639). However, unlike during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, FIG. 10-56 (
As shown in 3), during the small hit game, the right-handed display 26 is lit and the right-handed notification LED is displayed.
37 is not lit, and the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5
Is not displayed either.

Next, the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit-winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect will be described. 10-57 and 10-58 are explanatory views for explaining the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. In FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C) .... Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, there is a case where the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the 10R probability variation big hit is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 10-57 (A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Big hit!" And a round number display such as "Round 2". The prize ball number display 052IW008 is displayed. In addition, when a normal prize (a prize that is not an over prize) to the big prize opening occurs during the big hit game, the prize is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) as shown in FIG. 10-57 (B). 052IW009 (In this example, "+15"
(Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-winning occurs during the big hit game, and the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of over-winning is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, FIG. 10-57 (
As shown in C), the winning display 052IW according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect
010 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R
Therefore, the winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect is output (step 0).
52 IWS305, S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456 and the number of prize balls reaches 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (D), the image display device 5 displays characters such as "456 OVER" 052IW01.
1 is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).
..

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is decided, the image display device 5 shows "555". O
A character display such as "VER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect C, the image display device 5 displays "666".
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (E), when the big hit game is finished, the game state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state after the big hit game is finished. Further, when controlled to the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (F), a character display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" Is displayed, and the prize ball number display 052IW008 continues. Is displayed.

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball is won in the special winning opening, but if it is not decided to execute the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit winning, FIG. 10-58. As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (in this example, white) in the normal display color (white in this example).
(Character display of "+10") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS325 and S326).

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball wins in the special winning opening, and a suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning occurs based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening. It is assumed that the execution of is decided. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (G), the winning display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect, and the speaker is displayed. From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324).
For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 and the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability / second KT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (H), in the image display device 5, "2666 OVER"
, Etc. 052IW014 is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is decided, the image display device 5 “2456”.
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, the image display device 5 displays "25".
A character display such as "55 OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, although not shown, for example, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 1000. If this is the case, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls has reached 2000, the image display device 5 displays "
A character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number emphasis effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect C is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555,
Or, depending on the fact that the number has reached 2666 (in other words, the total of the game values given by the small hit during the big hit game or the high probability / the second KT state), the prize ball number display suggestion effect A ~ Although the case where F is executed is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. for example,
Depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. It may be configured to do so, and various aspects are conceivable.

Next, the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol will be described. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is a probable variable jackpot (10R in this example).
In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot), Fig. 10-59 (Fig. 10-59)
As shown in A), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See Y in IWS1128A).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation of a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIGS. 10-59 (B). When this is done, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol (step 0).
52N of 52IWS1128A, see step 052IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (C). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See N in IWS1127A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is a probable variable jackpot (10R in this example).
In the case of a big hit fluctuation that becomes a probabilistic big hit, a 6R probable big hit, or a 2R probable big hit), as shown in FIG. 10-59 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol fluctuates. The display continues. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1).
120B, see Y in step 052IWS1128B).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (in this example, 2R normal jackpot), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIGS. 10-59 (E). When this is done, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol (step 0).
52N of 52IWS1128B, see step 052IWS1129B).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (F). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See N in IWS1127B).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. In FIGS. 10-60, steps 052IWS1120A to S
The processing of 1127A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the modified example 1, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist.

In the first modification, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129A, and controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A).
.. In addition, in FIG. 10-60, the process of step 052IWS1130A is shown in FIG. 10-1.
It is the same as the process shown in 9.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the first modification. In FIG. 10-61, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129B, and controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B).
.. In addition, in FIG. 10-61, the processing of step 052IWS1130B is shown in FIG. 10-2.
It is the same as the process shown in 2.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 1.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probable change jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-62 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. Stop is displayed (N of step 052IWS1127A, step 052IWS112
See 9A).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (B). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See N in IWS1127A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probable change jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-62 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. Stop is displayed (N of step 052IWS1127B, step 052IWS112
See 9B).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-62 (D). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See N in IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. In FIGS. 10-63, steps 052IWS1120A to S
The processing of 1126A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the modified example 2, the processing of step 052IWS1127C is included instead of the determination processing of steps 052IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19. ..

In the second modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In addition, in FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the second modification. In FIG. 10-64, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 2, the determination processing of steps 052IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 is used. Instead, step 052I
Includes processing of WS1127D.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to send the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in FIG. 10-64, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probable change jackpot? As shown in FIGS. 10-65 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. In particular,
During the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052IWS1
See Y in 127C).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (B). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see step 052IWS1127C N, step 052IWS1129A).
..

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probable change jackpot? As shown in FIGS. 10-65 (C), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. In particular,
During the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052IWS1
See Y in 127D).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-65 (D). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see step 052IWS1127D N, step 052IWS1129B).
..

Further, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, for example, other than those shown in the modification 1 and the modification 2, for example, the deviation is lost. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the forced loss is stopped, while the variation display of the first special symbol that is a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is the 10R probability variation jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is out of alignment and fluctuates. It may be configured to stop forcibly regardless of whether it is a small hit fluctuation or a big hit fluctuation. With such a configuration, in this example, if the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed (see FIG. 10-29), 5
The second hold memory is 1 to 4 when the variable display of 0 times is completed and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state.
When there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit in the accumulated pieces, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing by forcibly stopping the loss. Further, in particular, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to a KT state as in this example, a normal state (low probability /
By performing a right-handed operation in the low base state), the 2nd start winning opening, which is easy to start winning, is made to start winning, and the 2nd special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, while the 1st starting winning opening is made to start winning. (1) It is effective as a preventive measure for such a strategy, as it is possible to have a strategy that causes the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, the feature unit 052IW controls to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol by the same control in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. The case (see FIGS. 10-59) is shown, but different controls may be used. Figure 10-
66 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modification 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIGS. 10-66, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B is shown in FIG.
It is the same as those processes shown in -22, but in the modified example 3, the determination process of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. Therefore, modification 3
Then, unless the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 0).
52IWS1125B N), CPU103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and 10-67 (C), in the modified example 3, a small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probable variable big hit. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-59 (A) and 10-59 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 (D) and (F), the small hit symbol is stopped in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a miss, a small hit, or a probable variable big hit. If displayed, FIGS. 10-59 (D), (F)
Similarly, even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-67 (B), in the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. Similarly to FIG. 10-59 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67 (E), in the modified example 3, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In, unlike FIG. 10-59 (E), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly removed and forced by the symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to display the stop is different.

In the modified example 3, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which is a normal big hit, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the normal big hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is continued, but it is limited to such a mode. do not have. For example, conversely, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal big hit, the variable display is continued, while the normal big hit. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to stop forcibly. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probable variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), it is forcibly missed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probable variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), it changes. It may be configured to continue the display. In this way, the control for forced loss stop may be different depending on whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification example 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 10-68, steps 052IWS1120A-S.
The processing of 1128A is similar to those processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that does not become either a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag. Check if it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). The process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131A is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the first special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probable change state.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 10-69, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 10-22.

In the fourth modification, the first step 052IWS1128B is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot).
When the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 is C for effect control.
Control is performed to send the second compulsory symbol confirmation specification command to the PU 120 (step 052IW).
S1129B). The process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the modification 4, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131B is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the second special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probable change state.

In the modified example 4, whether or not the probability change flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability change state).
Although the case where the control for forcibly stopping and displaying the display with the out-of-order symbol is performed is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display the missed symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Also, for example, high probability /
Only in the low base state (high probability flag is on, high base flag is off), it may be configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display with a missed symbol. In some way like that,
Any device may be used as long as it is configured to control the stop display with a symbol that is forcibly removed according to the current game state.

In addition, when the control is configured to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol only in the high probability / low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent a normal big hit by the variable display of one of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. be. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Then, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect) can be executed in response to the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific area (for example, the special winning opening).
Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production.

Specifically, in this example, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit winning based on the fact that the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, since the winning frequency to the special winning opening is particularly high during the small hit RUSH, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect. be able to.

In this example, a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening as a specific area. I can't be limited. For example, even if the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning opening 10, and the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening as a specific area. good. Further, as a specific area, the setting suggestion effect may be enabled to be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the out port. Also, for example, the passage gate 4 as a specific area.
The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates such as 1.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to set any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Further, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect) can be executed, and the ease of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period controlled to the special state (for example, FIGS. 10-43). As shown in, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed with a 3% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, the prize balls have a 2% probability. The number display suggestion effect B can be executed, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C can be executed with a 1% probability when the number of prize balls reaches 666, and 5 when the number of prize balls reaches 2456. % Probability suggestion of winning ball number display D
When the number of prize balls reaches 2555, there is a 3% chance that the prize ball number display suggestion effect E can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2666, there is a 2% chance that the prize will be awarded. The ball number display suggestion effect F can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production.

In this example, the number of prize balls is 456 or the number of prize balls is set as "the length of the period controlled by the special state".
It shows a case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed at the timing when 555, 666, 2456, 2555, and 2666 are reached (in other words, the period until a certain game value is given). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the "length of the period controlled by the special state" is the length of the period controlled by the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot gaming state), or
It may be the length of the period controlled by the special state (in this example, the small hit game state), or it may be the length of the total period thereof.

When the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) is used as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare to the ending of the big hit game is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, the longer the period from the fanfare of the big hit game to the ending, the higher the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed.
Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than the big hit with a large number of rounds.

Further, for example, as "the length of the period controlled by the special state", the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state can be used. Depending on the situation, it may be configured to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect. In this case, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of small hits increases, or the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of executions of the variable display increases. .. Further, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and various as "the length of the period controlled by the special state". Is conceivable.

In general, in a gaming machine, the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and "XXXXXX OVER".
When displaying such as, "1000 OVER" or "1000 OVER" of the prize ball number emphasis effect shown in this example
It is displayed in units with a certain degree of limitation, such as displaying in units of 1000 prize balls, such as "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in this example is a timing different from the usual timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666. Since it is executed in, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of discomfort to the occurrence timing of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, and a special display result as a display result of variable display. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different numbers of specific determination values are used.
It can be set to any of the setting values. Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in response to control to a special state (for example, a small hit occurs during a high probability / second KT state, and a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening. Based on what you have done, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize and a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

In this example, a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game during the small hit fluctuation or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. As such, it suffices if the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the control of the small hit in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17) are played when the game is controlled in an advantageous state and when the game is controlled in a special state. The medium (for example, a game ball) can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter or impossible-easy-to-enter state (for example, a closed state). Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, and the size is large. Based on the fact that a game ball has been won in the winning opening or the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In this example, when the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize and the suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state and the opening effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. As such, it suffices as long as it executes the setting suggestion effect in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, the low probability / first KT state is changed to the normal state (low probability / low base state).
(For example, when shifting to), the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, step 052IWS6).
24 changes the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

In this example, "when the control of the game state is switched" is set at the start or end of the big hit game, or when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). Although the case where the suggestion effect is configured to be feasible is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the production period when shifting to the big hit game during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), or shifting from the big hit game to the high base state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state). The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be feasible during the effect period. Further, for example, a gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined number of fluctuation displays during a high base state or to shift to a high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on a predetermined number of small hits. In the production period when shifting from the high base state to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable, and various as "when the control of the gaming state is switched". Is conceivable.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the effect of the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit and the effect of the ending effect at the end of the big hit, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, according to the number of controls to the special state in the special state, the total game value given by the special state in the special state, or the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666.
Depending on the number of pieces reached, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. Or, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A with different selection ratios according to the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state. ~
It may be configured to execute F. ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of execution of the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, as a special state, an advantageous special state (for example, the second K)
It is possible to control the T state) and the disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state) which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous special state. Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect by different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state (for example). Only when a small hit is made and a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In this example, the case where the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed only when the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, even if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls can be executed, and the game ball is inserted in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. Depending on whether the prize is won or the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state, it is possible to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect at different rates. It may be configured. Further, for example, even when an irregular game ball is won in the special winning opening during the non-KT state, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. ..

In the case of the above configuration, if a prize is awarded to the special winning opening in the 1st KT state (high base state) or an irregular winning occurs, or if a winning is generated in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison with, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate, or a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be performed. It may be configured to run.

In this feature unit 052IW, the value of the prize ball counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). Is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation hit and the 2R normal big hit and during the high base state (high probability / 1st KT state, low probability / 1st KT state). The prize ball number counter is not reset), and in principle, the prize ball number display is hidden, and the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). The case where the value of the prize ball counter is controlled to be reset at the time of transition is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. The value of the prize ball counter may be updated even during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variable big hit or the 2R normal big hit.

In this example, by configuring as described above, for example, high probability / second K
After ending the T state (small hit RUSH) and shifting to the high base state (high probability / first KT state, low probability / first KT state), a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the high base state. When the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is entered again, the value of the prize ball counter is updated and the prize ball number display is displayed while the number of prize balls in the previous small hit RUSH is inherited. can do.

Further, not limited to the mode of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when the 10R probability variation big hit is reached and the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is entered, the high probability / second KT state (Small hit RUSH) and the big hit game immediately before that may be set as one section, and the total number of prize balls in the section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the aggregated value.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, the current set value is set to the set value "1" as the "setting suggestion effect".
The case where the small hit winning suggestion effect or the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed in the mode suggesting any of "6" is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by suggesting whether or not the setting change has been made to change the setting value when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. good. As such, the "setting suggestion effect" may be any form of suggestion regarding the setting.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display display result is special. When the display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game is completed). Further, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information. The display result of the variable display of the identification information is not derived and displayed based on the derivation display (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first 2 The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed)
.. Further, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derivation display of It is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, when the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information results in a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) even though the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probable change state has occurred. The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probability change state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the identification information on one side is forcibly forcibly off and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forced off), even the variable display that is a probable change jackpot will be forcibly off. Therefore, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is forcibly missed, the fluctuation display that is a probability variation jackpot is extended (interruption of measurement of fluctuation time). , While suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this example, as an embodiment of "not stopping the variable display of one of the identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown in the case of continuous execution, but is not limited to such an embodiment. for example,
Even if it is configured to suspend (pause) the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and resume the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was interrupted after the end of the small hit game. good. It suffices as long as it does not completely stop the variable display in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, it is a state different from the advantageous state and is a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a low probability state). Further, the first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probable change state is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the probabilistic big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probable change state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize control considering whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, it is a state different from the advantageous state and is a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a low probability state). Also, when controlled to an advantageous state, a specific area (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state based on the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) through the V region 052IW104). Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the gaming medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Fig. 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed in either the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (). See Figures 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the first identification is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is displayed. Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, it is a state different from the advantageous state and is a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a low probability state). Further, the variable display executing means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state, and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 10-68, 10-). See 69). Further, when controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information as the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can be changed into a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to enter or cannot enter. A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state).
And a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) can be controlled, and the variable means is controlled to the first state when the special state is controlled. again,
The first start area is provided so that the game medium moving on a predetermined route (for example, the left area of the game area) can enter the movement path in which the game medium can move, and the variable means is a specific route among the movement paths. A game medium that moves (for example, the area to the right of the game area) is provided so as to be accessible. In addition, a specific notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to a specific route (for example, FIG. 10-56 (1).
), (Right-handed notification shown in (2)) can be executed, and when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to a special state, the specific notification is not executed (for example, FIG. 10-56 (for example). 3
)reference). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be executed. It is configured so that the winning rate (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than that of the small hit type on the 2nd special symbol side, and when a small hit is made in the variable display of the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special If the variable display of the symbol is forcibly disengaged and stopped, if the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is practically Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player will waste the game ball, and on the contrary, a disadvantageous launch promotion notification will be given, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right-handed notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable display of the second identification information. It is provided with a second reserved storage means (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) that can store information about the information. In addition, the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second
When the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the identification information, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state), and the variable display of the first identification information is displayed. Special display result as the display result of the variable display of the result or the second identification information (
For example, when the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a predetermined value can be given when controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the big winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification are more visible than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56 (1)) with high possibility. Further, when controlled in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed ().
(See FIG. 10-56 (1)), when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to a special state, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (FIG. 10-56). (2)
reference). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable display of the first identification information is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed, a higher ratio is more advantageous than when the variable display of the second identification information is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to a special state, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-56 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect of a common mode depending on whether it is controlled by a special state or not (not controlled by a special state).
For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the non-reach off symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B).
To prepare for. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the strategy measures against the gaming machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander from side to side is provided as a delay means. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the effect is produced based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the information from the game control means. Effect control means to control (for example, effect control CPU 120
) And. Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The case is shown, but it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made by the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if the big hit is made by the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as described above, if a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. In the case of a big hit, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variation display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing the right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where right-handed notification is executed even during the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a gaming machine provided on the left side of the gaming area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the reduced working hours state. May be good.

Further, in this example, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game, right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when executing the first fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are lit. The right-handed display 052IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right-handed notification. Or, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the big hit game, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LE.
Right-handed display 052IW0 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of D37.
It may be configured to execute right-handed notification by displaying 07.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangle display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, it is equipped with a plurality of special variable winning ball devices, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the small hit type. It may be configured so that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different depending on whether the case is a small hit or the case where the change display of the second special symbol is a small hit. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. , When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a high winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls. It may be configured as.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. It may be configured so that right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, if the second special symbol variation display is executed and a small hit occurs in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. In addition, using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination),
Determine the display result of the variable display. Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state.
In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, and a special display result as a display result of variable display. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, a plurality of set values (for example, the set value "1") having different numbers of specific determination values are used.
It can be set to any of the setting values from "" to "6"). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and when controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). See -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate playability in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, as a special state, a first special state (for example, the first K) is used.
It is possible to control a T state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate playability in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect corresponding to the advantage of the special state (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-55). Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display to be displayed is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the way is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the set value suggestion effect during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined by using the special type determination value (for example, the small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of small hit types is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the allocation of the small hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is used is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming excessively high in gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display mode is determined by using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 052IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in factors other than the big hit lottery. It is not preferable because the degree (difference in ball ejection performance) is greatly different, but in this feature unit 052IW, by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern common regardless of the set value,
I try to prevent such problems from occurring.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the case where the fluctuation pattern allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the fluctuation efficiency is set to be different depending on the set value by making the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing the difference in the fluctuation time. It may be configured so that the advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. In addition, using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination),
Determine the display result of the variable display. Further, the determination value is a specific determination value for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination).
And a special judgment value for deciding to derive and display the special display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment), and the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. It includes a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) for determining that the predetermined display result is different from that of the above. In addition, multiple setting values with different numbers of specific judgment values (
For example, it can be set to any of the set values "1" to "6"). Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values varies depending on the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-specific change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) which is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the non-specific state.
Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (FIG. 10-3).
And see Figure 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state can be performed. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result more frequently. Further, when a variable display that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggestion effect (for example, the setting shown in FIGS. 10-54) that suggests a set value is executed. Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state is displayed.
Is controllable. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, and a special display result as a display result of variable display. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1"" having different numbers of specific determination values are used.
It can be set to any of the setting values of to "6"). Further, among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate playability.

In the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the degree of advantage of the variable display display result with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information as a predetermined display result (forced stoppage). It was not possible to realize control in consideration of. Therefore, this feature unit 052
The IW also has the characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown below (means A1) to (means A6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display. It has been disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a variable display display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, the CPU
A special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (the part where steps S122 to S125 are executed) in 103). Step S126 in a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) that can be controlled by a state).
The variable display executing means is special in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed. Based on the derivation display of the display result, the update of the first control (for example, the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer) that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the identification information is interrupted, and the first 1st special symbol or 2nd special symbol variable display is continuously executed) and the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed by a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol). It is possible to display and stop the symbol (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol), and in the variable display of one of the identification information. Which of the first control and the second control is executed differs depending on the display result derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines the determination result of step 052IWS1128A, S1128B. Step 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, S1130B are executed by , S1130B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D.) It is characterized by that. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In the means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Specifically, step 052 in CPU103)
It may be configured to include a portion that executes IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (means A3).
For example, there is a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and becomes an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
The specific state control means is provided with a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the above.
The first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured to be controlled to a non-specific state based on the original state (for example, it is not controlled to a probable change state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to the means A3, the specific display result is the first.
There is a specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, specifically) that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state.
The specific state control means includes a specific region (for example, V region 052IW1) when the specific state control means is controlled to an advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)).
Executes steps 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
, When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the gaming medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), it is based on the normal jackpot. In the jackpot game, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to the means A4, the specific display result is the first.
There are a specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed), and the variable display executing means is a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where the second identification information is variable. In any case of executing the display, the special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. -3, see Fig. 10-4.), While the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information, is being executed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the above, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is N in step 052IWS1128A. When step 052IWS1129A, S1130A is executed. FIG. 10-67 (B).
)reference. ), When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information The variable display of the above is not controlled to be derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. 10-66, Figure 10-6
See 7 (E). ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means A6) In any of the means A1 to the means A5, the specific display result is the first.
There are a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It has a higher advantage for the player (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed), and it is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
The variable display executing means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the variable display execution means is controlled to the specific state. During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, CPU 103) is step 052I.
When WS1131A, S1131B is Y Step 052IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69. ), When controlled to a non-specific state, during execution of variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information as the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 4, for game control). Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, CPU 103) is N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B.
At this time, the process does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

In the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the degree of advantage of the variable display display result with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information as a predetermined display result (forced stoppage). It was not possible to realize control in consideration of. Therefore, this feature unit 052
The IW also has the characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown below (means B1) to (means B6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display. It has been disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a variable display display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, the CPU
A special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (the part where steps S122 to S125 are executed) in 103). Step S126 in a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) that can be controlled by a state).
The variable display executing means is provided with (a portion for executing S128), and the special display result is provided regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. FIG. 10-3, FIG.
See Figure 10-4. ), The identification of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the identification information. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example,
The update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is predetermined. The second control (for example, the out-of-order symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the out-of-order symbol)) derived and displayed based on the result (for example, the out-of-order symbol). The first control and the second control are executed depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, CPU 103) is in step 052.
Step 052IWS1129A, depending on the determination result of IWS1128A, S1128B,
S1130A, S1129B, S1130B are executed. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 052.
Step 052IWS1129A, depending on the determination result of IWS1127A, S1127B,
S1130A, S1129B, S1130B are executed. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 052.
Step 052IWS1129A, depending on the determination result of IWS1130C, S1130D,
S1130A, S1129B, S1130B are executed. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In the means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Specifically, step 052 in CPU103)
It may be configured to include a portion that executes IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (means B3).
For example, there is a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and becomes an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
The specific state control means is provided with a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the above.
The first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured to be controlled to a non-specific state based on the original state (for example, it is not controlled to a probable change state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of the means B1 to the means B3, the specific display result is the first.
There is a specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, specifically) that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state.
The specific state control means includes a specific region (for example, V region 052IW1) when the specific state control means is controlled to an advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)).
Executes steps 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
, When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the gaming medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), it is based on the normal jackpot. In the jackpot game, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to the means B4, the specific display result is the first.
There are a specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed), and the variable display executing means is a variable display of the first identification information and corresponds to the second specific display result. While the variable display is being executed, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in the modification 3). Game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)
Is step 052IWS1129A, S1 when N in step 052IWS1128A.
Execute 130A. See FIG. 10-67 (B). ), When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information Control to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example,
Specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processes of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67 (E). ) May be configured.
According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means B6) In any of the means B1 to the means B5, the specific display result is the first.
There are a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It has a higher advantage for the player (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed), and it is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
The variable display executing means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the variable display execution means is controlled to the specific state. During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, CPU 103) is step 052I.
When WS1131A, S1131B is Y Step 052IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69. ), When controlled to a non-specific state, during execution of variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information as the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 4, for game control). Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, CPU 103) is N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B.
At this time, the process does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 052IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, a configuration that makes it possible to change the set value shown by the feature unit 21TM is applied to the feature unit 052IW so that the set value suggestion effect can be executed, or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Right-handed notification can be executed, over-winning suggestion effect can be executed, small hit winning suggestion effect can be executed, and prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed. You may do it. Further, for example, a configuration in which the set value shown by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 052IW, and a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed. If this is the case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped and displayed by a symbol that is out of alignment, or the variable display may be continued.

Further, when the configuration shown by the feature unit 021TM is applied, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the setting value may be suggested by different aspects of the ending effect.
In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including a small hit RUSH or a chance mode may be executed, a card forgetting prevention notification such as a prepaid card may be executed, or a maker logo display may be displayed. It is configured to suggest the set value by configuring and changing the mode transition notification, the card forgetting prevention notification, the display mode of the maker logo display, and the display mode of the image to be displayed at the same time. You may.

In addition, the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-033787) and the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010)
-By combining the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 20092), it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in a game configured to be controllable in a special state. However, it is not possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game only by executing the setting suggestion effect in the game configured to be controllable in a special state. Therefore, the present feature unit 052IW is shown below for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the setting suggestion effect (means C).
The characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown in 1) to (means C7) are also disclosed.

(Means C1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing a game, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. Steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100, which is a game machine that can be set to a value and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, are executed. A portion) and a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is different from the advantageous state. , Step 052I in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the game value is easily given by the special state.
WS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, S2213 (execution part) and
Setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning) can be executed in response to the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening). For example, it is characterized in that it is provided with (a portion for executing 052IWS323, S324) in the effect control CPU 120. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means C2) In the means C1, the advantageous state control means can control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Yes, the special state control means controls a special state (for example, a small hit game state) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result. Display result determination means for determining the display result of the variable display by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). (For example, a portion for executing steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, S64B in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result in the determination value. The specific judgment value (for example, the judgment value for big hit judgment) and the special judgment value for deciding to derive and display the special display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) are Multiple set values that are included and have different numbers of specific judgment values (for example, set values "1" to "6")
Setting means that can be set to any of the set values (for example, a portion that executes steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 in the game control microcomputer 100).
The number of special determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or the means 2C, the setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit during the high probability / second KT state). Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening, it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

(Means C4) In any of the means C1 to the means C3, when the means is controlled in an advantageous state and when the means is controlled in a special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning). A variable means capable of controlling the ball device 17) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easy to enter and an easy-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium (for example, a game ball) is difficult or impossible to enter. A control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S122 to S124, S126, S127 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means corresponds to the fact that the variable means is controlled to be in an easy-to-access state. , The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, and the game ball is won in the large winning opening or the special winning opening. Originally, it may be configured so that a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls can be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

(Means C5) In any one of the means C1 to the means C4, the setting suggestion effect executing means is usually used when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, from the low probability / first KT state). It is configured so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 052IWS624) when the state (low probability / low base state) is entered. May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

(Means C6) In any one of the means C1 to the means C5, the setting suggestion effect executing means is the number of controls to the special state in the special state, the total of the game values given by the special state in the special state, or. Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 6).
Depending on the number of 66, 2456, 2555, or 2666 reached, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. Or, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A with different selection ratios according to the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state. It may be configured to execute ~ F.
) May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of executing the variable display.

(Means C7) In any one of the means C1 to the means C6, the special state control means is disadvantageous to the player as a special state as compared with the advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and the advantageous special state. It is possible to control the disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state), and the setting suggestion effect executing means plays the specific area when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and during the disadvantageous special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios depending on whether the medium has passed (for example, only when the game ball wins a small hit in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the suggestion at the time of the small hit winning). It may be configured to perform an effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

(Explanation of feature section 020SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH includes a gaming state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, a hold storage means, a setting means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the hold storage means, and the setting means are realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means can be controlled into an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small hit gaming state.

The special state is a state that is easily controlled by the special state, for example, the second KT state. The second KT state is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, and a game state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening. The non-special state is a gaming state that is less likely to be controlled by the special state than the special state, and is, for example, the first KT state. The first KT state is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, but it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening. The 2nd KT
Comparing the state and the first KT state, the frequency of small hits may be the same, but the second
In the KT state, the time controlled by the small hit game (for example, the opening time) is longer, so that the small hit game is more likely to be controlled.

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the advantageous state and the special state are states in which variable display (also referred to as “variable display”) is not performed. Specifically, the state in which the variable display is not performed is a state in which identification information (big hit symbol) indicating an advantageous state is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed, or identification information (small) indicating a special state. The winning symbol) is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed. For example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel at the same time, the state in which the variable display is not performed is one of the symbols (
For the special symbol), the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is being derived and displayed, and the stop display is in progress.
The other symbol includes the case where the variable display is suspended.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means is in a special state (second KT).
When controlled to a special state (small hit game state) in the state), it is possible to execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state. When controlled to a special state in a special state (second KT state), it is easy for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening. Therefore, the effect executing means, for example, executes a special effect for notifying the small hit game.

On the other hand, when the effect execution means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state (first KT state), it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests a content advantageous to the player. .. Even if the game is controlled to a special state in the non-special state (first KT state), the game ball rarely wins in the special winning opening. Therefore, in the non-special state, the effect executing means does not execute the special effect.

The suggestion effect is, for example, a hold change suggestion effect based on a look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, a probability change notification effect, and the like, as will be described later. However, the suggestion effect is not limited to these, and may be, for example, the maximum number of consecutive villas of the day in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of variable displays, the total number of prize balls, etc. There may be. Further, the content that is advantageous to the player, which is suggested by the suggestion effect, may be any information that the player wants to know in playing the game, and for example, the content that suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous state ( For example, suggestion that it is a low setting value) is also included.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means can perform variable display of decorative identification information in response to variable display of identification information. The decorative identification information is, for example, a decorative pattern. Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the effect executing means displays the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information. The special display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating small hits (for example, "1, 3, 5"). When the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the effect executing means may display a specific character indicating that the special state is controlled.

Further, when the effect execution means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the effect execution means displays a predetermined display result different from the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information. The predetermined display result is, for example, a combination of decorative patterns indicating loss. The combination of lost symbols may be randomly determined for each variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state for the variable display that has not been started yet. do. The determination made by the pre-start determination means is, for example, a look-ahead determination, specifically, a determination having the same contents as various determinations made when starting variable display, and a determination made before the various timings. be. The various determinations include, for example, a jackpot determination, a jackpot type determination, a fluctuation pattern determination, and the like.

The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect that makes a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. The suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is, for example, a suggestion of an effect performed based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the hold storage means stores the information related to the variable display as the hold storage information. The reserved storage information is, for example, information that has been determined by the pre-start determination means, but may include information that has not been determined. The effect executing means displays the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means as a hold display. For example, the effect executing means holds and displays the reserved storage information in a display mode according to the determination result by the pre-start determination means. The display mode of the hold display includes a normal display mode and a special display mode having a higher expectation than the normal display mode.

In addition, the effect execution means can execute an action effect that acts on the hold display in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the effect effect executing means can execute an action effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change as the hold change suggestion effect. For example, the action effect is an effect of clarifying the hold display of the target that may change and performing some action on the hold display of the target. Specifically, the action effect is, for example, an effect in which an object hits the hold display of the target, or an effect in which lightning strikes the hold display of the target. In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, there are times when the display mode of the hold display changes and times when the display mode of the hold display does not change. An effect in which the action effect is performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change is a so-called Gase effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “Gase hold change suggestion effect”). It should be noted that the suggestion effect for suggesting the pre-start determination means is not limited to the hold change suggestion effect. For example, when the hold storage information determined to be a big hit is stored, or the SP that becomes a loss (
When the hold storage information determined to be a look-ahead variation pattern of the super) reach is stored, a background image or a character image suggesting that the hold storage information with a high expectation of a big hit is stored is displayed. It may be used as a production.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the setting means can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. The set value is a plurality of values set corresponding to the winning probability of the big hit, and is, for example, a value set to any one of "1" to "6". The effect execution means is a suggestion effect (hereinafter, ""
"Set value suggestion effect") can be executed. The set value suggestion effect is an effect of causing the player to guess the set value, for example, by using the background image or the character image. The set value suggestion effect may be an effect showing the set value itself. In the feature unit 020SH, the set value suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the set value is higher than when the set value is low.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the non-special state includes the first non-special state.
There is a second non-special state, which is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the first non-special state. The first non-special state is a non-probability change state (low probability state), for example, a low probability / first KT state. Second
The non-special state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), for example, a high probability / first KT state.
The effect executing means can execute a common effect when it is controlled to the first non-special state and when it is controlled to the second non-special state. The common effect is, for example, an effect controlled by a common effect mode (“chance time mode” in the embodiment according to the feature unit 020SH). The effect mode is, for example, an effect in which a specific effect image different from the usual one, a specific BGM, or the like is executed over one or a plurality of variable displays. The effect image referred to here is, for example, a background image, a character image, a hold image, an active display image, an interface image, a decorative pattern image of a display mode, and the like.

Further, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the second non-special state is controlled (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “probability change suggestion effect”). The probabilistic suggestion effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image (for example, a specific background image, a specific character image, a character image, etc.) suggesting that the image is controlled to the second non-special state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects having different modes as the suggestive effects. As described above, the plurality of types of suggestion effects include a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect. In addition, there are a plurality of types of suggestion effects for each suggestion effect. For example, in the case of a hold change suggestion effect, there may be an effect in which the hold display is likely to change and an effect in which the hold display is unlikely to change.
Further, for example, in the case of the setting value suggestion effect, there are modes suggesting that the setting is likely to be high, and modes suggesting that the setting is likely to be low. Further, in the case of the probability change suggestion effect, there are modes suggesting that the probability of being controlled to the probability change state is high, and modes suggesting that the possibility of being controlled to the probability change state is low.

The advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of suggestion effect is executed in the feature unit 020SH. For example, in the set value suggestion effect, when the set value suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is high is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is likely to be low is performed. It is more advantageous for the player than the case where it is broken. Further, for example, in the probabilistic suggestion effect, when the probabilistic suggestion effect suggesting that the probabilistic state is likely to be controlled is executed, it is suggested that the probability of being controlled to the probabilistic state is low. This is more advantageous for the player than when the probability change suggestion effect of the aspect is executed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. Feature part 020SH
The gaming machine according to the above is provided with a first variable winning means. The first variable winning means is, for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (see FIG. 1) having a second starting winning opening. The first variable winning means is a first state (open state) in which the game medium easily passes through the starting area, and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to pass through the starting area.
It can be changed to a state (closed state).

The game state control means can control the first variable winning means to a predetermined state in which the first variable winning means is likely to change to the first state. The predetermined state is, for example, a non-special state, specifically, a first KT state (a game state in which a small hit game in which a game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed). The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect when it is controlled to a special state in a predetermined state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH is provided with a second variable winning means. The second variable winning means is, for example, a special variable winning ball device 17 (see FIG. 1) having a special winning opening for small hits. The second variable winning means can be changed into a winning easy state (open state) in which the game ball is easy to win and a winning difficult state (closed state) in which the game ball is difficult to win. The second variable winning means can be changed to a winning easy state in a special state (small hit game state). The effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the winning easy state. In particular,
For example, the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in accordance with the opening timing of the second variable winning means.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state (small hit) in the special state (for example, the second KT state), the game medium passes through the special area. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to the passage of a special area of the game medium. Specifically, the special region is a region (for example, a V region or a discharge region) through which a game ball that has won a prize in the special variable winning device 7 passes. The game ball that has passed through the special area is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening. As a result, the prize ball is paid out. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect showing a prize in the special variable winning device 7, or an effect of adding the number of prize balls paid out by the prize.

Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the effect executing means does not execute the predetermined effect regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the special area. Specifically, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect without executing the predetermined effect.

(Regarding the game state and transition of the production mode after the big hit game in the feature unit 020SH)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-1, the transition of the gaming state after the big hit game in the feature unit 020SH and the transition of the effect mode according to the gaming state will be described. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game according to the feature unit 020SH. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the feature unit 020SH, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the normal mode is controlled. Also, in the high probability / low base state, the small hit RU
It is controlled to SH mode. Further, in the high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state, the channel time mode is controlled. That is, in the high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state, a common effect is executed.

Further, as for the effect during the jackpot game, a common effect may be executed depending on whether the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed or the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is executed. That is, it is sufficient that the combination of the common decorative symbols is stopped and displayed for the 6R probability variation jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot, and the common jackpot effect is executed even during each jackpot game.
As a result, was the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot executed (whether it is controlled to the high probability / high base state) or was the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot executed (to the low probability / high base state)? Is it controlled?) Can be prevented from being discriminated by the player.

In the feature unit 020SH, in the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), the normal jackpot determined in the jackpot type determination is not determined to be a 6R normal jackpot in principle, but is determined to be a 2R normal jackpot. Therefore, when the 2R jackpot game is executed in the KT state, the player knows that the transition has been made to the low probability / high base state or that the low probability / high base state has been continued. Therefore, when a jackpot game based on a 2R normal jackpot is executed in the KT state, an effect of notifying a low probability / high base state (a separately prepared jackpot effect or effect mode) may be executed.

Further, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed in the KT state, the player knows that the transition to the high probability / high base state or the continuation of the high probability / high base state has been continued. .. Therefore, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed in the KT state, an effect of notifying the high probability / high base state (a separately prepared jackpot effect or effect mode) may be executed. In other words, the chance time mode may be controlled only in the so-called first hit case, that is, the transition from the normal state to the high probability / high base state or the transition to the low probability / high base state. It may be limited to the case where it is done.

In the jackpot type determination, the 6R normal jackpot may be determined without being determined as a 2R normal jackpot. As a result, in the KT state, any type of jackpot game can be performed by performing a common effect between the case where the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is executed and the case where the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed. Was executed (
It is possible to prevent the player from distinguishing whether it is controlled to a high probability / high base state or a low probability / high base state).

(An example of the effect mode setting process related to the feature unit 020SH)
Next, an example of the effect mode setting process related to the feature unit 020SH will be described with reference to FIG. 11-2. FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode setting process related to the feature unit 020SH. The effect mode setting process is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 020SHS11). When the jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) is received (step 020SHS11: YES), that is, when a jackpot occurs, the effect control CP
U120 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (step 020SHS12). When it is not a probabilistic jackpot (step 020SHS12: NO), that is, when it is a 2R normal jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the chance time mode (step 020SHS14). Ends a series of processes. In the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may determine an effect mode (separately prepared effect mode) for notifying a low probability / high base state.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS12, when it is a probabilistic jackpot (step 020S).
HS12: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 020SHS13). 6R Probability change jackpot (step 020SHS13)
: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the chance time mode by shifting to step 020SHS14. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a common effect (chance mode) in the case of a normal jackpot and the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, if it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 020SHS1)
3: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS15), and ends a series of processes.

When the jackpot start designation command has not been received in step 020SHS11 (
Step 020SHS11: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS16). When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS16: YES), the effect control CPU 12
0 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS16: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17). In step 020SHS17, the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the reception waiting time of the command (“step 020SHS17” in step 020SHS17.
Judge whether or not (corresponding to the "predetermined period") has passed.

In step 020SHS17, when the predetermined period has not elapsed (step 020).
SHS17: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17: YES), that is, when it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", the effect control CPU 120 has the value of the effect high base number counter "0". (Step 020SHS18). When the value of the high base count counter for production is "0" (step 020SHS18: YES)
, The effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the value of the effect high base count counter is not "0" (step 020SHS18: NO), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the effect high base count counter by "1" (step 020SHS19).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect high base number counter has become “0” (step 020SHS20). When the value of the high base count counter for effect is not "0" (step 020SHS20: NO), the effect control CPU 12
0 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the value of the high-base count counter for effect becomes "0" (step 020SHS20: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the normal mode (step 020SHS21), and a series of series. End the process.

In the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, when the big hit game is executed and then controlled to the high probability / high base state or the low probability / high base state by the process of steps 020SHS12 to 14, it is common. It is controlled by the chance time mode, which is a production. For this reason,
It is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the control is in the high probability / high base state or in the low probability / high base state.

(An example of variable display compatible display control processing related to feature unit 020SH)
Next, an example of the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display) control process related to the feature unit 020SH will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. FIG. 11-3 shows the feature unit 020SH.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display correspondence display control processing which concerns on. The variable display compatible display control process is a process executed in the look-ahead notice setting process of S161 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start winning designation command has been received (step 020SHS31). When the start prize designation command (first valid start prize designation command or second valid start prize designation command) has not been received (step 020SHS31: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the start prize designation command is received (step 020SHS31: YES), the initial color which is the display mode at the start of the hold display is determined (step 020SHS32).
), The final color which is the final display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display) is determined (step 020SHS33). In the determination of the initial color and the determination of the final color, the initial color determination table and the final color determination table described below are used.

(Initial color determination table and final color determination table for variable display compatible display)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table for variable display compatible display. In FIG. 11-4, (A) shows an initial color determination table, and (B).
) Indicates the final color determination table. In (A), the display mode indicates a display mode when starting variable display compatible display (hold display). Further, in (B), the display mode indicates the display mode of the variable display compatible display (active display) to be finally displayed.

In the feature unit 020SH, the display mode of the variable display compatible display is such that the variable display is being executed, the variable display is started (so-called hold shift), or the small hit game is being executed in the chance time mode. It can change at the timing of change. In (A) and (B), four types of display modes are shown: "red", "green", "blue", and "gray". The display mode of "ash" is a normal display mode. Further, the display modes of "red", "green", and "blue" are special display modes different from the normal display modes.

Further, in (A) and (B), the fluctuation pattern indicates any one of "big hit", "SP (super) reach loss", and "other loss". Here, in the feature unit 020SH, the production mainly during the chance time mode (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state) will be described. Therefore, in FIG. 11-4, the high probability / high base state is shown. The variation patterns used in the state or the low probability / high base state (variation patterns shown in FIGS. 10-8 (E) and 10-9 (H)) will be described as an example.

The fluctuation pattern of the "big hit" is, for example, the second fluctuation pattern # 13, which has a fluctuation time of 2 minutes.
It is # 28. In the second fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 28, the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The fluctuation pattern of "SP reach loss" is, for example, the fluctuation time of 2.
The second variation pattern of the minute is # 09, # 12, # 24, # 27. Second fluctuation pattern # 0
In 9, # 12, # 24, and # 27, the decorative pattern indicating the loss is stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The fluctuation pattern of "other loss" is, for example, a second fluctuation time of 1 second or 5 seconds.
The fluctuation patterns are # 07, # 08, # 22, and # 23.

Further, the "other loss" fluctuation pattern is the second fluctuation pattern # 10, # 11, # 25, #, which is selected when the fluctuation time is 1 second or 5 seconds and it is determined to be a small hit. 26
including. Second variation pattern # 07, # 08, # 22, # 2 with variation time of 1 second or 5 seconds
In No. 3 and the second variation patterns # 10, # 11, # 25, and # 26, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the SP reach mode, and the definite decorative symbol of the combination of loss is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the second fluctuation pattern # 07, # 08, # 22, # 23 and the second fluctuation pattern # 10, # 11, # 25, # 26 in which the fluctuation time is 1 second or 5 seconds, the normal reach effect is produced. It may be performed and the definite decorative symbol of the combination of the loss in the reach mode may be stopped and displayed.

As shown in (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "big hit", the display mode of the final color is "red".
Is most likely to be selected, then "green" is most likely to be selected, then "blue" is most likely to be selected, and "ash" is the least likely to be selected. Further, as shown in (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "SP reach loss", "green" is most likely to be selected, then "red" is most likely to be selected, and then "blue" is the final color display mode. It is easy to select, and "ash" is the most difficult to select. Further, as shown in (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "other loss",
As for the display mode of the final color, "ash" is most likely to be selected, then "blue" is most likely to be selected, then "green" is most likely to be selected, and "red" is most difficult to be selected. Therefore, when the jackpot expectation of the display mode is expressed by an inequality sign, it is "red">"green">"blue">"gray".

On the other hand, as shown in (A), in any variation pattern, "ash" is most likely to be selected, then "blue" is most likely to be selected, and then "green" is selected as the initial color display mode. It is easy to do, and "red" is the most difficult to select. This makes it possible to gradually change from a display mode with a low expectation to a display mode with a high expectation at the change timing of the display mode. Further, when comparing (A) and (B) with respect to the fluctuation pattern of "other loss", (B) has a higher expectation of display mode ("blue" and "green").
Is easier to select. As a result, even in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "other loss", it is possible to gradually change from the display mode with low expectation to the display mode with high expectation. Further, in the feature unit 020SH, the display mode is changed to a display mode with a low degree of expectation, that is, the so-called effect is prevented from falling.

Returning to FIG. 11-3, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial color and the final color, the determined initial color and the expected degree of the display mode of the final color are compared, and the final color is higher than the expected degree of the display mode of the initial color. It is determined whether or not the degree of expectation of the color display mode is high (step 020SHS34). When the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the final color is lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the initial color (step 020SHS34: NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display compatible display according to the display mode of the initial color. (Step 020SHS37). If the expectation level indicated by the final color display mode is lower than the expectation level indicated by the initial color display mode, and if a change effect is performed to change the display mode of the variable display compatible display, the effect is reduced. Therefore, by shifting to step 020SHS37, the change effect is not performed.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS34, when the expectation degree indicated by the final color display mode is higher than the expectation degree indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: YES), the effect control CPU 120 displays the final color display mode. , Store in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 020SHS35).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed (step 020SHS36). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display compatible display (hold display) according to the initial color display mode (step 020SHS37), and ends a series of processes.

(An example of suggestion effect execution processing performed by the effect control CPU 120 when controlled to a small hit game state)
Next, an example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the small hit game state is controlled will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6. Figure 11-5
And FIGS. 11-6 show the effect control CPU 120 when the small hit game state is controlled.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution processing performed by. Figures 11-5 and 11-
The suggestion effect execution process shown in 6 is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS51). When the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS5)
1: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (first KT state) (step 020SHS52). When the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is
It is determined whether or not the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020).
SHS53).

When the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53)
: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets to execute the effect (effect for notifying the small hit) according to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS54), and ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the effect mode is not controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: NO), that is, when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect (loss) according to the normal mode. Direction: Make a setting (step 020SHS55) to execute (continuously display the decorative pattern stopped and displayed by the combination of loss), and end a series of processing.

In step 020SHS52, when the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is set with a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed. It is determined whether or not the flag has been set (step 020SHS56). When the change flag is not set (step 020SHS56: NO), the effect control CPU 120 is set to step 020S.
Move to HS63. On the other hand, when the change flag is set (step 020SHS).
56: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the hold display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57).

When the display mode of the hold display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57: YE)
S), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS57: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS5).
8). In determining the presence or absence of the hold change suggestion effect, the hold change suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a determination table for various suggestion effects. Figure 11-7 (
A) shows a pending change suggestion effect determination table. The hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining either "with hold change suggestion effect" or "without hold change suggestion effect". "With hold change suggestion effect" is displayed after performing the hold change suggestion effect (
For example, at the start of the next variable display), it is shown that a series of change effects in which the display mode of the hold display changes is performed. "No hold change suggestion effect" indicates that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (change effect is not performed).

In FIG. 11-7 (A), the determination ratio of "with pending change suggestion effect" is higher than the determination ratio of "without pending change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small hit game state, when the hold display has not changed to the display mode of the final color, the hold change suggestion effect is likely to be performed. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold display is changed to a display mode in which the display mode of the hold display being displayed shows a higher expectation level by performing the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, for example, if the display mode of the hold display at the present time is "gray", it changes to "blue", and if the display mode of the hold display at the present time is "blue", it changes to "green". I will do it.

The display mode of the hold display after the change is not limited to the display mode in which the expectation level is increased by one level, but may be a display mode in which the expectation level is increased by two levels or a display mode in which the expectation level is increased by three levels. good. Specifically, the display mode for changing the display mode of the hold display may be any display mode that is less than or equal to the expected degree indicated by the final color, and for example, when there are a plurality of display modes up to the display mode of the final color. (For example, when the initial color is "gray" and the final color is "red"), one of multiple display modes ("blue", "green", "red") is determined. You may try to do it.

Further, in the embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, whether or not to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is determined, for example, when the variable display or the small hit game is executed.
I decided to decide each time, but it is not limited to this. For example, a scenario (story) indicating the timing of performing the change effect up to the final color may be determined in advance, and whether or not the change effect is performed may be determined by referring to the scenario. In addition, by including the transition of the display mode in the scenario, whether or not to perform the change effect and the color after the change may be determined by referring to the scenario.

Returning to FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59). When the pending change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020)
SHS59: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when performing the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS60). Specifically, in step 020SHS60, the effect control CP
The U120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and determines whether or not the display mode of the reserved display after the change is the final color.

When the display mode of the hold display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS60: NO)
), The effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS62. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS60: YES), the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS61). Then, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS62), and ends a series of processes. An example of the pending change suggestion effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-10, but it is a series of effects including a first fanning effect, a second fanning effect, and an action effect.

In FIG. 11-6, in step 020SHS64, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect (step 020SHS63). In determining the presence or absence of the set value suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (B) shows a set value suggestion effect determination table. The set value suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect and the type of the set value suggestion effect for each set value. In FIG. 11-7 (B), the "set value" indicates any of "1" to "6".

In addition, the "type" of the setting value suggestion effect is "odd number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an odd number setting, "even number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an even number setting, and the setting value. Is "4
"Suggested to be 4 or more set values" and "Suggested to be 4 or more" are shown. The effect of "odd number setting suggestion" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is an odd number (any of "1", "3", and "5"). The effect of "even number setting suggestion" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is an even number (any of "2", "4", and "6"). The effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more" has a set value of 4 or more (
It is a decisive effect in the case of "4", "5", or "6").

Further, the setting value suggestion effect is different in the effect mode depending on the type, for example, the background image is different. The background image is, for example, an image showing the morning in the case of the "odd number setting suggestion" effect, and an image showing the daytime in the case of the "even number setting suggestion" effect, and is an effect of the "setting value 4 or more suggestion" effect. case,
It is an image showing the night.

As shown in the set value suggestion effect determination table, "no set value suggestion effect" is determined at the highest ratio regardless of whether the "set value" is "1" to "6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value suggestion effect from being performed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value.

Further, the effect of the "odd number setting suggestion" is determined at a higher rate as the "setting value" becomes higher as "1", "3", and "5". Therefore, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is "5" by producing the "odd number setting suggestion" effect. Similarly, the effect of "even number setting suggestion" increases as the "setting value" becomes "2", "4", and "6".
Determined at a high rate. Therefore, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is "6" by producing the "even number setting suggestion" effect. Further, the effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" becomes higher as "4", "5", and "6". For this reason, the setting value becomes "suggestion" by performing the effect of "suggesting a setting value of 4 or more".
It can be suggested that there is a high possibility that it is "6".

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the set value suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect in step 020SHS63 (step 020SHS64). When performing a setting value suggestion effect (step 020SHS64: YES)
, The effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the set value suggestion effect (step 0).
20SHS65), a series of processes is completed. As for the setting value suggestion effect, for an example,
As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11-12, this is a series of productions including the first fanning effect and the second fanning effect. On the other hand, when the set value suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS64: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the probabilistic incitement effect (step 020SHS66). In determining the presence or absence of the probabilistic effect, the probabilistic effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (C) shows a probability change suggestion effect determination table. The probability change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining the presence / absence of the probability change suggestion effect and the type of the probability change suggestion effect for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. In FIG. 11-7 (C), the "probability state" is a "high probability" which is a probabilistic state (high probability / high base state) and a "low probability" which is a non-probability change state (low probability / high base state). Indicates one of. In addition, the types of probabilistic suggestion effects are "suggesting high probability", which suggests that there is a high possibility of being in a high probability state, and "suggesting high probability", which suggests that there is a high probability of being in a high probability state. There are three types, "suggesting a possibility" that suggests "possible" and "suggesting a small possibility" that suggests that the possibility of being in a high probability state is lower than "suggesting a possibility".

As shown in the probability change suggestion effect determination table, the "probability state" is "high probability" and "low probability".
In any case, "no probabilistic suggestion effect" is determined at the highest rate. This will result in
It is possible to prevent the probability change suggestion effect from being performed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing whether the player is controlled to the high probability state or the low probability state. ..

In addition, as shown in the probability change suggestion effect determination table, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the rate at which "no probability change suggestion effect" is determined is lower than in the case of "low probability". That is, the rate at which any kind of probabilistic suggestion effect is determined is high. As a result, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the probability change state is controlled by the probability change suggestion effect itself.

In addition, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the effect of "suggesting high possibility" is most likely to be determined, followed by the effect of "suggesting medium possibility", which suggests "small possibility". Is the most difficult to determine. In addition, when the "probability state" is "low probability", the effect of "suggesting a small possibility" is most likely to be determined, followed by the effect of "suggesting a medium possibility", which suggests a "high possibility". Is the most difficult to determine. As a result, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a high probability state when the effect of "suggesting high probability" is performed. Also, if the production of "suggesting the possibility" is performed, is it controlled to a high probability state?
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the control is in a low probability state. In addition, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a low probability state when the effect of "suggesting a small probability" is performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 020SHS66 whether or not to perform the probability change suggestion effect, and as a result, determines whether or not to perform the probability change suggestion effect (step 02).
0SHS67). When performing the probability change suggestion effect (step 020SHS68: YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the probability change suggestion effect (step 020SH).
S69), the series of processes is terminated. The details of the probabilistic suggestion effect are shown in Fig. 11-13.
As will be described later using the above, it is a series of productions including the first fanning effect and the second fanning effect. on the other hand,
When the probabilistic suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS68: NO), the effect control CPU 1
20 determines whether or not the final color of the hold storage being displayed on hold is all determined to be gray (
Step 020SHS69). Specifically, in step 020SHS69, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color of each reserved storage stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, so that the final color of the reserved storage being displayed can be changed. Judge whether all are decided to be gray.

When the final color of the hold storage being displayed on hold is not all determined to be gray (step 020S)
HS69: NO), that is, when at least one of the reserved storages in the reserved display is determined to be the special display mode, the effect control CPU 120 is used for the first fanning effect ((FIG. 11-10) (FIG. 11-10). C) Make settings to execute) (step 020SHS73),
Ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the final color of the hold storage during the hold display is all determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS70). Gase hold change suggestion production
It is a hold change suggestion effect that is executed even though the display mode of the hold display does not change.
As a result, it is a series of productions in which the pending change suggestion production becomes a disappointing production. In determining the presence or absence of the Gase hold change suggestion effect, the Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (D) shows a Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table. The Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining either "with Gase hold change suggestion effect" or "without Gase hold change suggestion effect". "Gase hold change suggestion production"
Indicates that the display mode of the hold display does not change after the hold change suggestion effect is performed (for example, at the start of the next variable display). "No hold change suggestion effect" indicates that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (change effect is not performed).

The decision rate of "with Gase hold change suggestion effect" is higher than the decision rate of "without Gase hold change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small hit game state, it is possible to make the production lively by the effect of suggesting a change on hold.

In the feature unit 020SH, the Gase hold change suggestion effect is executed as the Gase effect, but it may be possible to execute the Gase setting value suggestion effect that is not performed by pretending to be the set value suggestion effect. It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect that does not pretend to be a suggestion effect.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 020SHS70 whether or not to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect, and as a result, determines whether or not to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS71). When performing a change suggestion effect on hold (step 020S)
HS71: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets for executing the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS72), and ends a series of processes. The Gase hold change suggestion effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 11-11, but is a series of effects including a first fanning effect, a second fanning effect, and an action effect. On the other hand, when the Gase hold change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS71: NO), the effect control CPU 120 is set to step 020.
Move to SHS74.

By the above processing, during the chance time mode (high probability / high base state or low probability /
In the small hit game state in the high base state), the hold change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect,
And it becomes possible to execute one of the suggestion effects of the probability change suggestion effect.

(An example of the change effect execution process of the variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display)
Next, an example of the change effect execution process of the variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8. FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect execution process of the variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display. The variable display compatible display change effect execution process shown in FIG. 11-8 is a process executed in the variable display start wait process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is set is set (step 020SHS101). If the change flag is not set (step 020SH)
S101: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the change flag is set (step 020SHS101: YES), the effect control CPU
120 determines whether or not the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS102).

When the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS1)
02: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS102: NO).
), The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the target variable display compatible display is an active display (step 020SHS103). When the target variable display compatible display is the active display (step 020SHS103: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the active display to forcibly execute the final color display mode (step 020SHS107). ).

Here, in step 020SHS107, the display mode of the active display changes from the current display mode to the display mode of the final color, so that the display mode may change to a display mode in which the degree of expectation is one step higher. It may change to a display mode in which the degree is increased by two or more steps. On the other hand, when the target variable display compatible display is not the active display (step 020SH).
S103: NO), it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display (step 020).
SHS104). The rate for determining to change the display mode of the hold display is, for example, the decision rate for changing the hold display with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game (FIG. 11-7 (A).
) Shall be the same as the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect: 70/100), but may be different.

Then, when the effect control CPU 120 does not change the display mode of the hold display as a result of the determination in step 020SHS104 (step 020SHS105: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when changing the display mode of the hold display (
Step 020SHS105: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS106). Specifically, in step 020SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color. Judge.

When the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS106: YE)
S), the hold display is set to execute a change effect for changing the display mode of the final color (step 020SHS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS108), and ends a series of processes. Step 02
In 0SHS106, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS106: NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode having a higher expectation. Make settings for execution (step 02)
0SHS109), a series of processes is completed.

It should be noted that the change effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the variable display and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game are different effects. Specifically, in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the variable display, the hold change suggestion effect is not performed.

(An example of the transition of the production screen in the small hit RUSH mode)
Next, an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-9. In addition, in FIG. 11-9, in the small hit RUSH mode (high probability / second).
The transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed during (in the KT state) is shown. FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode.

FIG. 11-9 (A) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small symbol 020SH201 are variably displayed on the image display device 5. In the small hit RUSH mode, only the small symbol 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative symbol 020SH200. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 has a display result and a variation pattern (for example, the second variation pattern # 32 in FIG. 10-9) specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11.
) And the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various advance notice effects, and the execution of various effects such as the effect mode according to the game state. The presence / absence, its mode, the execution start timing, etc. are determined, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the determination result.

Further, in (A), the total prize ball number display 020SH204 is displayed. Total prize ball number display 0
20SH204 indicates the total number of prize balls in the consecutive chan including the small hit RUSH mode. Also,(
In A), a notification image including the character "right-handed" is displayed as a notification image corresponding to the right-handed notification in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the broadcast image may include an image showing an arrow pointing to the right in order to encourage right-handed striking. Further, in FIGS. 11-9, the hold display and the active display are not displayed, but these may be displayed. In the screen shown in (A), when the variable display stop timing is reached, the screen transitions to the screen (B).

FIG. 11-9 (B) shows a screen when the fluctuation is stopped when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the small hit notification image 020SH202 indicating a small hit is displayed on the image display device 5, and the small symbol 020SH201 is stopped at a definite symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small hit game. It is displayed. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a decorative pattern 020SH2 from the effect control pattern.
Corresponding to the fact that the end code indicating the end of the variable display of 00 (and the small symbol 020SH201) has been read, or that a command has been received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol 020SH200 should be stopped and displayed. , The final decorative symbol 020SH200, which is the display result of the decorative symbol 020SH200, is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 11-9 (C) shows a screen during the small hit game in the small hit determination in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, when there is a prize in the special winning opening in the small hit game state, the image display device 5 displays the winning effect image 020SH203 indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls).
Is displayed. Further, the total prize ball number display 020SH204 shows a number added by 10 balls as compared with (B) of FIG. 11-9.

FIG. 11-9 (D) shows a screen at the time of winning a prize in the special winning opening of the second ball during the small hit game. In the small hit game state, if there is a prize in the special winning opening of the second ball, the image display device 5
In addition, a prize effect image 020SH203 (for example, 10 balls) showing the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls)
A total of two images) are displayed. Further, the total prize ball number display 020SH204 shows a number added by 10 balls as compared with (C) of FIG. 11-9. The same applies to the third and subsequent balls, and if there is a prize in the special winning opening, the image display device 5 further displays the winning effect image 020S.
H203 is additionally displayed.

In displaying the screens shown in (C) and (D), if the effect control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening winning designation command (effect control command), the second KT state flag is set (that is,). , If it is in the high probability / second KT state), 10 is added to the value of the prize ball counter, and the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed on the image display device 5. When the small hit game is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E), and the next variable display is started.

As shown in FIGS. 11-9, when it is determined to execute the small hit game in the small hit determination in the small hit RUSH mode, the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the small symbol 020SH201 showing the small hit are stopped and displayed. During the small hit game, the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed according to the winning of the special winning opening. That is, high probability / second KT
In the state, when the small hit gaming state is controlled, the small hit notification image 020SH202, the small symbol 020SH201, and the winning effect image 020SH203 corresponding to the control of the small hit gaming state are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small hit game in the small hit RUSH mode.

(An example of the transition of the suggestion effect in the chance time mode)
Next, an example of the suggestion effect in the chance time mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13. In addition, in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed during the chance time mode (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state). show. In the description of FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the same contents as those described in FIGS. 11-9 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

(An example of the transition of the effect that changes the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. In addition, FIG. 11-1
0 and FIGS. 11-11 (A) to (E) show similar screens.

11-10 and 11-11 (A) show variable display during the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 has a decorative symbol 020SH200 and a small symbol 0.
20SH201 is variably displayed. Further, the image display device 5 displays an active display 020SH205 and a hold display 020SH206 as variable display compatible displays. In the chance time mode, only the small symbol 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative symbol 020SH200. In (A), the variable display compatible display is
Both show a normal display mode (eg, "ash").

In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 has a display result or a variation pattern (for example, FIG. 10-) specified by an effect control command received from the main board 11.
The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the second variation pattern # 11 of 8 or the second variation pattern # 26) of FIG. 10-9 and the gaming state. Further, in displaying the variable display compatible display, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, the display mode of the variable display compatible display based on the determination result of the look-ahead notice effect, and is variable in the display mode according to the result of the determination. Display compatible display is displayed. On the screen shown in (A), when the variable display stop timing comes, (B)
Transition to the screen of.

11-10 and 11-11 (B) show a screen at the time of suspension of fluctuation when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit in the small hit determination in the chance time mode. Specifically, although the image display device 5 is determined to be a small hit, a prize ball cannot be expected. Therefore, both the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 show a combination of loss. It is stopped and displayed at, and the small hit notification image 020SH202 (Fig. 11-1).
0 (see (B)) is not displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, (
Transition to the screen shown in C).

11-10 and 11-11 (C) show a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (fanning effect 1: step 1). Specifically, in the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the first fanning effect image 020SH211 suggesting that the suggestion effect (hold change suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect, and probability change suggestion effect) may be performed. Is displayed. The first fanning effect image 020SH211 is, for example, an image showing that a character appears. In addition, the decorative pattern 020SH200 is erased, and the small hit notification image 020S
H202 is stopped and displayed as it is with a symbol indicating a combination of loss. In the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the special winning opening is rarely won. Further, even if the special winning opening is won in the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9 (C) is not displayed.

11-10 and 11-11 (D) show a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (fanning effect 2: step 2). Specifically, the image display device 5 has (C).
The second fanning effect image 0 suggesting that a suggestion effect (one of the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) may be performed rather than the fanning effect 1 of).
20SH212 is displayed. The second fanning effect image 020SH212 is an image developed from the first fanning effect image 020SH211 and is, for example, an image in which the character operates (an image in which the character swings a sword).

11-10 and 11-11 (E) show a pending change suggestion effect, specifically,
The screen during the small hit game in the chance time mode (action effect: step 3) is shown. Specifically, the action effect image 020SH213 is displayed on the image display device 5. The action effect image 020SH213 is an image obtained by developing the second fanning effect image 020SH212, and for example, the character acts on the hold display 020SH206 (the sword acts on the hold display 020SH).
It is an image (in contact with 206).

FIG. 11-10 (F) shows a change in the hold display in the chance time mode (step 4).
) Is shown. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes from the display mode of high expectation (for example, from "ash") at the timing of the hold shift 020SH214 when the variable display of the decorative symbol 020SH200 is started. (Changed to "blue") is displayed.
That is, as shown in (E), the action effect image 020SH213 in the small hit game state.
Acted on the hold display 020SH206, so that in (F) of FIG. 11-10,
A series of change effects are performed in which the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 is changed. In FIG. 11-10, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 is changed when the next variable display is started after the small hit game is completed, but the display mode is not limited to this, for example, the small hit. During the game (before the start of the next variable display), the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 may be changed.

On the other hand, FIG. 11-11 (F) shows a Gase effect (Gase hold change suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the hold display in the chance time mode does not change. Specifically, the decorative pattern 020SH
It shows the case where the display mode of the hold display 020SH 206 does not change to the display mode of high expectation even at the timing of the hold shift 020SH214 at which the variable display of 200 is started. That is, although the action effect image 020SH213 (image showing the bow and arrow) acted on the hold display 020SH206 in the small hit game state as shown in (E), the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 in (F) of FIG. 11-11. Will not change (the production will not develop).

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, the feature unit 020SH has the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202. Are all stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a combination of losses, and it is possible to execute a hold change suggestion effect (display of the action effect image 020SH213) that suggests a content advantageous to the player during the small hit game. again,
By the hold change suggestion effect or the Gase hold change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, it is possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold display, and it is controlled to the small hit game state in the chance time mode. You can make effective use of the period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, in (C) of FIG. 11-11, although the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) and the action effect image 020SH213 shown in (E) are not displayed. May be done. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the action effect image 020SH213 is not displayed. Further, in (E), the action effect image 020S
In some cases, H213 does not act on the hold display 020SH206 (for example, an effect of displaying an image in which a character flies is displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5).

In addition, the first fanning effect image 020SH211 and the second fanning effect image 020SH212,
For each image (or at least one of the images) with the action effect image 020SH213, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the hold display 020 is set according to these display modes.
The easiness of change of the display mode of SH206 may be different. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easy to determine when the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes, and a display mode that is easy to determine when the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 does not change.
You just have to prepare. Further, the display mode of the hold display 020SH 206 may be changed without displaying the action effect image 020SH213, that is, without performing the hold change suggestion effect.

(An example of the transition of the setting value suggestion effect in the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a set value suggestion effect in the chance time mode. In addition, (A) to (D) of FIG. 11-12 are (A) of FIG. 11-10 and b (FIG. 11-10).
Since it is the same as A) to (D), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 11-12 (E) shows a screen (set value suggestion effect) during the small hit game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a set value suggestion image 020SH 220 whose background image indicates night. Set value suggestion image The night background image in 020SH220 is an image suggesting that the set value is 4 or more (see (B) in FIG. 11-7).
..

FIG. 11-12 (F) shows that the small hit game is completed and the next variable display is performed. In the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-12, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed within the period controlled by the small hit gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following Even after the start of the variable display, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 may be continuously displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-12, in the feature unit 020SH, when it is determined in the small hit determination in the chance time mode that the small hit game is to be executed, the decorative symbol 020SH2
Both 00 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a combination of loss, and the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed during the small hit game. That is, in the feature unit 020SH, when controlled to the small hit gaming state in the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the setting value suggestion effect suggesting the content advantageous to the player (setting value suggestion). Image 020SH220 display) can be executed. FIG. 11
By the setting value suggestion effect shown in -12, the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the set value suggestion effect, there is a case where the disappointment effect is performed in the same manner as the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, in FIG. 11-12 (C), there is a case where the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, but the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is not displayed.

In addition, the first fanning effect image 020SH211 and the second fanning effect image 020SH212,
For each image (or at least one of the images) with the action effect image 020SH213, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the ease with which the set value suggestion effect is executed differs depending on these display modes. May be. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easy to determine when the set value suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is easy to determine when the set value suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

(An example of the transition of the probability change suggestion effect in the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a probability change suggestion effect in the chance time mode. 11-13 (A) to (D) are shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-10 (A).
)-(D), the description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 11-13 (E) shows a screen (probability change suggestion effect) during the small hit game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a probability change suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear. The probability change suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear is an image showing that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a high probability state (see (C) in FIG. 11-7).

FIG. 11-13 (F) shows that the small hit game is completed and the next variable display is performed. In the probability variation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, the probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed within the period controlled by the small hit gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following variable display is performed. The probability change suggestion image 020SH230 may be continuously displayed even after the start of.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the feature unit 020SH, when it is determined in the small hit determination in the chance time mode that the small hit game is to be executed, the decorative symbol 020SH2
Both 00 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a combination of loss, and the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed during the small hit game.
That is, in the feature unit 020SH, when controlled to the small hit gaming state in the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the probabilistic incitement effect suggesting the content advantageous to the player (probability variation suggestion image 020SH230). Display) can be executed. By the probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the probabilistic change suggestion effect, there is a case where the disappointment effect is performed in the same manner as the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, in FIG. 11-13 (C), there is a case where the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, but the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is not displayed.

In addition, the first fanning effect image 020SH211 and the second fanning effect image 020SH212,
For each image (or at least one of the images) with the action effect image 020SH213, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the ease with which the probabilistic effect is executed differs depending on these display modes. You may. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the probability variation suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is easily determined when the probability variation suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

Each suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13 can improve the interest in the small hit game state in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the chance time mode in which the variable display of 1.5 seconds is continuously executed, the small hit game is executed even if the small hit game exceeding 1.8 seconds is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize this, and it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the game may have stopped during the small hit game in the first KT state, and in the first KT state, a light game (with a good tempo). , A pleasant game) can be realized.

(About the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-14, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hit game and the execution timing of various suggestion effects will be described. FIG. 11-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects. FIG. 11
In -14, the variable display of the special symbol (second special symbol) determined to be a small hit in the small hit determination and the small hit game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 17) executed thereafter are shown.

First, the variable display of the special symbol and the small hit game will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, in the first KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. The variable display time (variation time) of the second special symbol in the first KT state is 1 second if the second reserved storage number is "1 or more" (second variation pattern # 11 in FIG. 10-8 or FIG. 10). -9 is the second variation pattern # 26), and if the second reserved storage number is “0”, it is 5 seconds (the second variation pattern # 10 in FIG. 10-8 or the second variation in FIG. 10-9). Fluctuation pattern # 25). When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol (for example, a small hit symbol) is confirmed and displayed until the symbol confirmation period (also referred to as a symbol confirmation period) of 0.5 seconds elapses.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses, it is controlled to the small hit game state. The small hit game state includes a fanfare period of 0.1 seconds, a predetermined opening period, and a small hit ending period. Specifically, in the small hit game state, after the small hit fanfare period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, and when a predetermined opening period (for example, 1.8 seconds) elapses,
The special variable winning ball device 17 closes and shifts to the small hit ending period. When the small hit ending period has elapsed, the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the execution timing of the hold change suggestion effect (including the Gase hold change suggestion effect) will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, when the small hit fanfare period has elapsed and the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 is reached, the first fanfare effect (first fanfare image 0 in FIG. 11-10) is reached.
20SH211 display), 2nd fanning effect (2nd fanning effect image 020SH212 display),
And the action effect (display of the image in which the action effect image 020SH213 is in contact with the hold display 020SH206) is performed. Then, when the hold display is changed (in the case of the hold change suggestion effect), the hold display changes at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (the timing of the hold shift). On the other hand, in the case of the Gase hold change suggestion effect, the hold display does not change at the timing (timing of the hold shift) when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the display mode of the current hold display is maintained.

As described above, in the feature unit 020SH, the small hit game, the variable display, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display are performed. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the transition from the small hit game state to the state in which the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Next, the set value suggestion effect and the probability change suggestion effect will be described. In the description of FIGS. 11-14, the set value suggestion effect and the probability change suggestion effect are referred to as “set value suggestion effect, etc.”. FIG. 11
As shown in -14, when the small hit fanfare period has elapsed and the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 is reached, the first fanfare effect (for example, the first fanfare effect image 020S in FIG. 11-12) is reached.
(Display of H211), second fanning effect (display of second fanning effect image 020SH212), setting value suggestion effect, etc. (display of set value suggestion image 020SH220, etc.) are performed. The set value suggestion effect and the like are executed until, for example, the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17.

As described above, in the feature unit 020SH, the set value suggestion effect and the like are performed corresponding to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, it is difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is possible to pay attention to the setting value suggestion effect and the like. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins, and it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly. In addition, the period controlled by the small hit game state can be effectively utilized by the set value suggestion effect or the like, and the interest during the small hit game can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 020SH, each suggestion effect is started at the timing of the opening start of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, since each suggestion effect can be started immediately after the transition to the small hit game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The timing at which each suggestion effect is executed may be any timing according to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, specifically, the timing including the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17. good. For example, the start timing of each suggestion effect is not limited to the timing of the opening start of the special variable winning ball device 17, and may be the timing during the small hit fanfare period. As a result, these effects can be started at the earliest timing after the transition to the small hit game state, so that it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed.

Further, the start timing of each suggestion effect may be the timing during the symbol confirmation period.
It may be the timing during the variable display of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the transition from the state in which the variable display is executed to the small hit game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Further, the end timing of the set value suggestion effect and the like is not limited to the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, and may be the timing during the small hit ending period. As a result, these effects can be executed until the end of the small hit game state, so that the period controlled by the small hit game state can be more effectively utilized.

Further, the end timing of each suggestion effect may be the timing during the variable display of the next second special symbol. This makes it difficult for the player to discriminate the transition from the small hit game state to the state in which the variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the interest of the game can be improved. Here, I would like to make a concrete supplement on the improvement of interest. In the first KT state, for example, a shortening fluctuation (1 second fluctuation) and a small hit game (decorative symbol is stopped at a lost symbol) are repeatedly executed. If no special effect is performed in the small hit game state, it seems as if the progress of the game is stopped in the small hit game state. Therefore, in the first KT state (high base state), the game does not seem to proceed quickly and lightly, and the player may feel a sense of discomfort. In addition, the time controlled to the small hit gaming state in the first KT state may be wasted time for the player.

As described above, in the embodiment according to the feature unit 020SH, when the small hit gaming state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state), it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting the content (for example, one of a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect). Therefore, even if the small hit game is repeatedly executed in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins, the player can be given the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the first KT.
The small hit game in the state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Further, since the period in which the small hit game is executed in the first KT state can be effectively utilized, it is possible to suppress that the period is wasted time for the player.

Further, when the small hit gaming state is controlled in the second KT state, an effect corresponding to the control of the small hit gaming state (for example, display of the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIGS. 11-9) is displayed. Made feasible. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state and the second KT state.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment relating to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 020SH is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 020SH to a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine. An example of one specification of a pachinko gaming machine of a mixed type of one type and two types will be described below.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the one-type and two-type mixed type, in the normal state (non-special state: low base state), the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed by left-handing (the first special symbol game).
When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the jackpot game is executed.

In the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 6298/65536 (about 1/100). Although the details will be described later, even if the small hit game is executed based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the game ball passes through the specific area (V area) in the special variable winning ball device 17. Things can hardly be expected.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning of the first starting winning opening is shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is 329/65536 (about 1/199).
When the set value is "2", it is 346/65536 (about 1/189).
When the set value is "3", it is 366/65536 (about 1/179).
When the set value is "4", it is 387/65536 (about 1/169).
When the set value is "5", it is 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", it is 439/65536 (about 1/149).

Since the small hit probability is constant in the judgment based on the winning of the first start winning opening, the set values "1" to "6" are set by making the loss probability different according to the set values "1" to "6". 6
The jackpot probability can be set according to the above.

For example, in the first special figure game, when it is determined to execute the jackpot game, the game shifts to a special state (for example, a time saving state) after the jackpot game is executed according to the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). .. When the big hit game is executed, depending on the big hit type, it may return to the normal state, for example, without shifting to the special state.

In the special state, for example, the game (mainly the second special figure game) is performed by right-handed striking aiming at the gate arranged on the right side of the game area and the second start winning opening. The special state is a high base state, and specifically, the following controls (1) to (4) are performed.
(1) Control is performed to make the probability of hitting a normal figure higher than in the normal state.
(2) Control is performed to make the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory longer than the normal state.
(3) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal figure game from the normal state.
(4) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol from the normal state.
This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, and the frequency with which the second special figure game is executed increases. The special state is controlled, for example, until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the above controls (1) to (4) are not performed. Even if the player hits right in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal figure is low, the opening time of the normal electric accessory is short, and the fluctuation time of the normal figure game is long, so the second start winning opening To win a prize is
I can hardly expect it.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 62896/65536 (about 96/100). It should be noted that the small hit probability in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening and the small hit probability in the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening are different.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning of the second starting winning opening is shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is 329/65536 (about 1/199).
When the set value is "2", it is 346/65536 (about 1/189).
When the set value is "3", it is 366/65536 (about 1/179).
When the set value is "4", it is 387/65536 (about 1/169).
When the set value is "5", it is 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", it is 439/65536 (about 1/149).

Since the small hit probability is constant in the judgment based on the winning of the second start winning opening, the set values "1" to "6" are set by making the loss probability different according to the set values "1" to "6". 6
The jackpot probability can be set according to the above.

As described above, in the judgment based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit probability is 96 /.
Since it is 100, the small hit symbol is likely to be derived and displayed in the variable display in the special state (mainly the second special figure game). In the small hit game state, the special variable winning ball device 17 arranged on the right side of the game area is opened, and the game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 (small hit attacker).
When passing through a specific area (so-called V area) provided in the special variable winning ball device 17, a big hit game is executed. In the small hit game state in the special state, since the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is longer than in the normal state, it is easy to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is easy to pass through the V region. It has become.

In the special state (mainly the second special figure game), when the game ball passes through the V area under the control of the small hit game state until the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, the special state is terminated. A jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the special state, even when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed).
, Similarly, the special state is terminated and the jackpot game is executed. Then, when the big hit game is executed, it is controlled to the special state again according to the big hit type (with a predetermined probability). in this way,
By performing the jackpot game in a special state (by the consecutive villas), the player can expect many prize balls.

On the other hand, in the special state, even if the jackpot game is executed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, depending on the jackpot type, the game shifts to the normal state without being controlled by the special state. In some cases. Further, even when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the special state, the normal state is entered. Specifically, in the special state, if the big hit game is not executed until the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (for example, although the game is controlled to the small hit game state, the game ball wins a special variable prize. If the ball device 17 does not win a prize, does not pass through the V region, or the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed), the normal state is entered. As a result, the control of the special state ends, and the consecutive villa ends. Even in a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine, for example, a variable display of a special symbol is not performed in the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

In such a one-kind and two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine, when the small hit gaming state is controlled in a special state, a special effect corresponding to the control of the small hit gaming state (special state) (for example, "small hit attacker") (Display the image of "Aim for the special variable winning ball device 17)!") Can be executed. Thereby, in the small hit game in the special state, the player can expect a big hit.

Further, in the variable display of the first special figure game in the normal state (non-special state: low base state), the small hit symbol may be derived and displayed (small hit probability: about 1/100). In the small hit game in the normal state, the game is performed by hitting the left side, and since the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged in the right side area, it is difficult to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17. .. Even if you hit right, it is difficult to win in the special variable winning ball device 17 because the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short, and even if you win in the special variable winning ball device 17, V Since it is difficult to pass through the region, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will pass through the V region.

In the first modification, in such a one-kind two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine, a normal state (
When controlled to the small hit game state (special state) in the non-special state), the feature unit 020S
The suggestion effect related to H may be made feasible. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests content that is advantageous to the player, for example, a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, and the like. The suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination is, for example, a hold change suggestion effect, but is not limited to this, and is an effect suggesting that the hold storage information having a high expectation of a big hit is stored (for example,). It may be a display of a background image, a character image, or the like with a high degree of expectation).

Even in the special state, when the first hold storage is stored, the small hit symbol may be derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special figure game. In this case, if the small hit game is configured to be difficult to pass through the V region, the suggestion effect related to the feature unit 020SH may be executed when controlled by the small hit game.

According to the first modification, even if the small hit game in the normal state in which the game ball hardly wins is executed, the player can be given the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the small in the normal state. The hit game can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Therefore, according to the first modification, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the normal state in the one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine. The type / two mixed type pachinko gaming machine is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, and may have other specifications as long as the small hit game in a normal state in which the gaming ball hardly wins is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the feature unit 020SH can be expressed as follows. A gaming machine capable of playing a game (a kind and two mixed type pachinko gaming machine), in which a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state and identification information (for example, a special symbol) are variably displayed and displayed. The game state control means includes a variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the result, and an effect execution means, and the game state control means has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state and a non-special state (for example, a small hit game state)
A special state (feature unit 0) that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state.
The special state according to the modification 1 of the 20SH: for example, a time saving state) can be controlled, the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed, and the effect executing means is described. When controlled to the special state in the special state, it is possible to execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, display an image of "Aim at the small hit attacker (special variable winning ball device 17)!"). When controlled to the special state in the non-special state, there is a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests content that is advantageous to the player (for example, a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination). , Setting value suggestion effect, etc.) can be executed.

(Variation example 2 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH described above, the configuration in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened once at the time of a small hit has been described. In the second modification, instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the special variable winning ball device 17 may be opened a plurality of times according to the small hit type.

Specifically, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit C having the longest opening time.
In the case of, it was set to 1.8 seconds x 1 time (see FIG. 10-14), but it is not limited to this. The opening pattern may be, for example, when the opening time is the longest, the total opening time may be 1.8 seconds or less, and may be 0.9 seconds × 2 times or 0.2 seconds × 9 times. In addition, it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect of the content according to the opening pattern. Specifically, for example, a suggestion effect corresponding to opening 0.9 seconds × 2 times may be executed. In this way, even if the opening pattern is opened a plurality of times, the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided by performing a suggestion effect according to the opening pattern.
It is possible to make it difficult to pay attention to the opening of, and to pay attention to each suggestion effect.

(Variation example 3 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, the configuration in which the suggestion effect can be executed in the first KT state has been described. In the third modification, the suggestion effect may be executed in the normal state (low probability / low base state) in place of or in addition to such a configuration.

For example, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed by winning the first start winning opening, but the small hit probability in the small hit determination in this case is
As shown in FIG. 10-3, it is "6298/65536" (about 10%). The type of small hit by winning the first start winning opening is small hit A (opening time: 0.2 seconds). again,
When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit (small hit A) is executed, the non-reach lost symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the player does not have excessive expectations. There is.

Therefore, in the modification 3, the suggestion effect may be executed when the small hit game state is controlled in the normal state. In addition, in order to secure the time to execute the suggestion effect, the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be set long. As a result, the effect in the small hit game in the normal state can be made useful for the player. Therefore, the period controlled by the small hit game in the normal state can be effectively utilized, and the interest of the small hit game in the normal state can be improved.

After shifting from the low probability / high base state to the normal state, the variable display based on the second hold storage may be executed. Specifically, immediately after the transition from the low probability / high base state to the normal state, variable display based on the second reserved storage stored in the low probability / high base state before the transition may be executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display based on the second hold storage in the normal state. When the small hit game is executed,
The variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the period controlled by the small hit game state, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is extended for the period controlled by the small hit game state. In the modified example 3, it is also possible to perform a suggestion effect during the period when the variable display of the first special symbol is extended. That is, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect in the normal state (low probability / low base state). As a result, the first
The period during which the variable display of special symbols has been extended can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

(Variation example 4 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 020SH, a configuration for executing a pending change suggestion effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree has been described as a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination. In the modified example 4, instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a suggestion effect suggesting the jackpot type when the pre-reading determination is made as a jackpot. May be feasible.

For example, when the hold memory determined to be a 2R normal big hit is stored during the small hit game in the high probability / first KT state, that is, from the high probability / first KT state to the low probability / first KT state. If it is known that the transition is made, it may be possible to perform an unfortunate effect (unfortunate effect) for the player during the small hit game. Specifically, for example, in a small hit game before the variable display based on the hold memory determined to be a 2R normal big hit is started, the background image is darkened, or the background image is a skull and crossbones image. You may perform an effect such as displaying an effect image. Further, in this case, for example, for the reserved memory of the target, for example.
A hold change suggestion effect may be performed to change the hold display to a hold display with a skull and crossbones image.

On the other hand, during the small hit game in the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, 1
It was found that when the hold memory determined to be a 0R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is stored, that is, the transition from the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state to the second KT state is stored. If this is the case, it may be possible to perform a production (high expectation production) that is pleasing to the player during the small hit game. Specifically, for example, 10R probability variation jackpot or 2
In the small hit game before the variable display based on the hold memory determined to be the R probability variation big hit is started, the background image is displayed brightly (rainbow color), and the background image is an image of an angel mark or an effect. You may perform an effect such as displaying an image. Further, in this case, for example, a hold change suggestion effect may be performed on the hold memory of the target to change the hold display to a hold display with an image of an angel mark.

In addition, if a plurality of small hit games are executed before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage of the target for which the look-ahead is determined is executed, the same suggestion effect (similar suggestion effect) in the multiple small hit games.
A disappointing effect or a high expectation effect) may be performed, that is, a suggestion effect may be performed a plurality of times. Further, when the variable display corresponding to the target hold storage is executed a plurality of times, the same suggestion is made not only in the small hit game state but also in the multiple variable displays. You may perform the production. That is, such a suggestion effect may be continuously executed until the variable display based on the hold storage of the pre-reading determination target is started.

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 5 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment according to the feature unit 020SH, the ratio for determining to change the display mode of the hold display during the variable display in FIG. 11-8 (“change determination ratio during variable display” in the description of the modified example 5”. ) Was explained as the same ratio as the determination ratio (decision ratio of the hold change suggestion effect) in which the hold display is changed with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game. In the modified example 5, the change determination ratio during the variable display and the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect may be different ratios.

For example, the decision rate of the pending change suggestion effect may be higher than the change decision rate during the variable display. As a result, it is easier to change the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggestion effect than the change of the hold display during the variable display, and the period controlled by the small hit game state can be effectively utilized.

Further, the change determination ratio during the variable display and the determination ratio of the hold change suggestion effect may be different depending on the pre-reading determination (determination of big hit) result for the hold storage information of the target. For example, when it is determined by the look-ahead determination that a big hit is to be executed, the decision rate of the hold change suggestion effect is set to be higher than the change determination rate during the variable display, while the look-ahead determination determines that the jackpot is lost. In this case, the decision rate of the pending change suggestion effect may be lower than the change decision rate during the variable display. As a result, the change in the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggestion effect can be made to have a higher degree of expectation than the change in the display mode of the hold display during the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion effect during the small hit game.

In the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state), the hold display may be changed more easily than in other gaming states (normal state or second KT state). That is, the chance time mode may be set as the mode in which the display mode of the hold display is most likely to change. Further, in this case, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect may be higher than the change determination ratio during the variable display. That is, among the effects of changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display may be most easily executed with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 6 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 020SH, the Gase hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game is executed when the final color of the hold memory during the hold display is all gray (FIG. 11-6). 020SHS70: YE
See S). In the modification 6, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the Gase hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game is stored in the hold memory during the hold display.
It may be feasible even when the reserved storage determined to have a special display mode other than gray as the final color is stored.

In this case, the hold storage determined to have a gray final color may be easier to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect than the hold storage determined to be the special display mode. As a result, even when the reserved storage determined to be the special display mode is stored, it is possible to perform the Gase holding change suggestion effect for the reserved storage determined to be the display mode whose final color is gray. You can liven up the production during the hit game.

On the contrary, for the hold storage determined to be the special display mode, it may be easier to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect than the hold memory determined to have the final color gray display mode. for example,
For the hold memory whose final color is determined to be the special display mode, the hold change suggestion effect may be forcibly executed, and the hold change suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, in the active display, the display mode is changed to the final color. As a result, it is possible to intentionally lower the expectation of the player at the stage of the hold display, and to increase the expectation when the display mode changes at the stage of the active display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion production.

(Variation example 7 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 7 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration for performing a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect has been described. In the modification 7, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, an explanatory suggestion effect regarding the progress of the game may be made feasible as a suggestion effect.

The explanation suggestion effect is, for example, an effect using a character image relating to the progress of the game in the chance time mode, and specifically, an explanation suggestion effect such as "maybe the mode shifts to the normal mode in 50 games?" There is a possibility that it is controlled to a high probability state in the chance mode at the time of the first hit, as well as an explanation suggestion effect such as "It's about to reach RUSH mode!" (62% = "5"
6/56 + 35 "%: see FIG. 11-1), which is an explanatory suggestion effect such as" Is the probability of probability change a little over 60%? ".

Here, in the feature unit 020SH, the gaming state is a normal state, a high probability / first KT.
It is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the game because the game state is controlled to one of a plurality of game states such as a state, a low probability / first KT state, and a second KT state, and the game state changes. be. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the explanatory suggestion effect of the modification example 7, it is possible to easily make the player grasp the game state and the like that can be transferred after the chance mode.
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Variation example 8 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 8 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 020SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is controlled to a high probability state until the next jackpot when the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is executed will be described. did. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 020SH to a gaming machine (for example, a so-called ST machine) that is controlled to a high probability state until a predetermined number of times elapses. Here, a specification example of the pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine will be described.

For example, in the ST machine, when the probability variation jackpot is executed, it is controlled to a high probability state until the variable display of the specified number of times (ST number of times) is executed, and when the variable display of the specified number of times is executed, it is high. It shifts from the probability state to the low probability state.

In addition, when the probabilistic jackpot is executed, a high base state (high probability / 1st K) is performed after the probabilistic jackpot game.
It is controlled to T state). The period controlled to the high probability / first KT state (variable display number) is the period corresponding to the probability variation jackpot symbol (transition variation number). When the number of transition fluctuations is executed after being controlled to the high probability / first KT state, the transition from the high base state (high probability / first KT state) to the low base state (second KT state) is performed. The number of transition fluctuations is, for example, less than the number of STs.

As a result, control is possible in the second KT state from the time when the number of transition fluctuations elapses until the number of ST times elapses, that is, a small hit game in which a prize can be expected is executed. The second
If the jackpot is not won even once before the variable display of the ST number is executed in the KT state, the variable display of the ST number is executed to return to the normal state. Here, when the small hit gaming state is controlled in the second KT state, the effect corresponding to the control of the small hit gaming state (for example, the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020 shown in FIGS. 11-9).
SH203 display) can be executed.

Further, in the ST machine, when the normal jackpot symbol is executed, it is controlled to a high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the normal jackpot game. The period controlled to the low probability / first KT state (variable display number) is usually a period corresponding to the jackpot symbol (transition fluctuation number). Low probability / 1st KT
When the number of transition fluctuations is executed after being controlled by the state, a high base state (low probability / 1st KT)
Transition from the low base state (normal state) to the low base state (normal state).

In the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state, a common effect (for example, a Chantime mode) may be executed. In the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is difficult for the game ball to win the special variable winning ball device 17, that is, the winning ball cannot be expected.

In the modified example 8, when the small hit game state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state) in the ST machine, a suggestion effect suggesting an advantageous content for the player. (For example, any one of the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) may be enabled.

According to the modified example 8, even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed in the ST machine, the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly is obtained by executing the suggestion effect. Can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small hit game in the first KT state. In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state. The pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, and may have other specifications as long as a small hit game in which the gaming ball hardly wins is executed.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 020SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature portion 020SH, a pachinko gaming machine is known in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, and small hits are frequently generated in a probabilistic gaming state (for example). , Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-033787.). However, when a small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins is executed, the variable display is not performed during this period, which may give the player the impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. be. Specifically, for example, assuming that a small hit game in which a game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed,
In the small hit game state, the special symbol is stopped and displayed each time, which may give the player the impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. For this reason, the player may feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

(Means D1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means D1 according to the feature unit 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game), and the gaming state control for controlling the gaming state. The means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) for executing steps S120 to S128 shown in FIG. 6) and the identification information (for example, a special symbol) are variably displayed and displayed. Variable display execution method for deriving and displaying the results (
For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 10) shown in FIG.
The part that executes steps S25A and S25B in 3) and the effect executing means (for example,
The game state control means includes an effect control CPU 120), and the game state control means has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. , A non-special state (first KT state) and a special state (for example, a second KT state) that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state, and the advantageous state and the special state are described above. When the variable display is not performed and the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, the small effect shown in FIG. 10-9). Hit notification image 020SH202, small design 020
SH201 and winning effect image 020SH203) can be executed, and when controlled to the special state in the non-special state, it is a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests advantageous contents for the player (suggestion effect). For example, the pending change suggestion effect (shown in FIG. 11-11 (E)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game is repeatedly executed in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, that is, The small hit game in a non-special state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state by the suggestion effect.

(Means D2)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D2 according to the feature unit 020SH, in the gaming machine according to the means 1, the effect executing means corresponds to the variable display of the identification information and the decorative identification information (for example, for example.
It is possible to perform variable display of the decorative pattern), and when it is controlled to the special state in the special state, it is confirmed that the display result of the decoration identification information is a special display result (for example, a combination indicating a small hit game). When the symbol "1, 3, 5") is displayed and controlled to the special state in the non-special state, a predetermined display result (decoration indicating loss) different from the special display result is displayed as the display result of the decoration identification information. The combination of symbols) is displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening during the small hit game, so that the predetermined display result (for example, the lost symbol) is forcibly stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected.

(Means D3)
Further, it is shown that the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state for the variable display which has not been started yet in the gaming machine described in the means D1 or D2 as the gaming machine of the means D3 according to the feature unit 020SH. The effect executing means includes the pre-start determination means for determining (for example, pre-reading determination) whether or not the display result is obtained, and the effect executing means provides the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 11-10) to make a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. (Holding change suggestion effect shown in (E)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination can be performed, the expectation for the reserved memory can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

(Means D4)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D4 according to the feature unit 020SH, the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1D to D3 includes a holding storage means for storing information related to the variable display as a holding storage information, and the effect executing means , The hold storage information stored in the hold storage means is displayed as a hold display (for example, hold display 020SH206 shown in FIG. 11-10 (A)), and an action acting on the hold display in the suggestion effect. Direction (for example, Fig. 11-10)
(E), the action effect image 020SH213) can be executed, and there are a case where the display mode of the hold display changes and a case where the display mode of the hold display does not change.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform a series of effects including an action effect and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display, it is possible to pay attention to the hold display and increase the expectation for the hold memory. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

(Means D5)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D5 according to the feature unit 020SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means D1 to D4, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. The setting value suggestion image 020SH2 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-12 is provided with the setting means, and the effect executing means makes a suggestion regarding the setting means.
20) is feasible.

According to such a configuration, in the small hit game in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player can guess the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

(Means D6)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D5 as the gaming machine of the means D6 according to the feature unit 020SH, the non-special state includes the first non-special state (for example, the non-probability changing state:
There are a low probability / first KT state) and a second non-special state (for example, a probabilistic state: high probability / first KT state) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first non-special state. The means can execute a common effect (chance time mode) between when it is controlled to the first non-special state and when it is controlled to the second non-special state, and the suggestion effect is It is suggested that the second non-special state is controlled (for example, the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-13).

According to such a configuration, the common effect is executed when controlled by either the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, and the probability change suggestion effect is performed in the small hit game in the Chantime mode. Since it is feasible, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not the player is in the probabilistic state in the small hit game in the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

(Means D7)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D6 as the gaming machine of the means D7 according to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means has a plurality of types of suggestive effects (for example, different modes) as the suggestion effects. Odd number setting suggestion, even number setting suggestion, shown in (B) of FIG. 11-7.
And the suggestion of a set value of 4 or more) can be executed, and the advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of the suggestion effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion effects, so that it is possible to prevent the suggestion effects from becoming monotonous. In addition, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the suggestion effect, the degree of attention of the player can be different depending on the suggestion effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

(Means D8)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D7 as the gaming machine of the means D8 according to the feature unit 020SH, the variable display executing means is a variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol). And the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel, and the first state in which the gaming medium easily passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). A variable first variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 1) is provided in the second state in which the gaming medium is difficult to pass through the starting region, and the gaming state controlling means is the first. The variable winning means can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, the first KT state) that easily changes to the first state, and the effect executing means controls the special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) in the predetermined state. When it is done, the suggestion effect can be executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the first. The small hit game in the 1KT state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state.

(Means D9)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D9 according to the feature unit 020SH, in the gaming machine described in any one of the means D1 to D8, a winning state in which the gaming ball is easy to win (open state) and a winning state in which the gaming ball is difficult to win. A second variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. 1) that can be changed is provided in a difficult state (closed state), and the second variable winning means is easy to win in the special state. The effect execution means can change to a state, and the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the winning easy state (for example, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17). ..

With such a configuration, it is difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is possible to pay attention to the suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins, and it is possible to prevent the small hit game from deteriorating the interest of the game.

(Means D10)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D9 as the gaming machine of the means D10 according to the feature unit 020SH, the gaming state control means has a specific region (for example, a special variable) in the gaming medium in the special state. It is possible to control the advantageous state based on passing through a specific region (so-called V region) in the winning ball device 17.

According to such a configuration, even if a small hit game is executed in a normal state (non-special state) in which the pachinko machine in which the feature unit 020SH is a kind and two types mixed type, the game ball hardly wins a prize, the game is smoothly played. It is possible to give the player the impression that is progressing, that is, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small hit game in the normal state. In particular, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the normal state.

(Means D11)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D10 as the gaming machine of the means D11 according to the feature unit 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the gaming medium is used. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special area (for example, the discharge area) (for example, the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening), the passage of the game medium corresponds to the passage of the special area. Predetermined effect (for example, Fig. 11-
The winning effect image 020SH203) shown in 11 (C) can be executed, and when the game medium is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the predetermined state is determined regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the special area. Do not perform the production.

According to such a configuration, in the second KT state, the player can be encouraged to win a prize in the special variable winning opening, and the interest in the second KT state can be improved. On the other hand, in the small hit game in the first KT state, although the game ball may rarely win a prize in the special variable winning opening, in order to prevent the predetermined effect from being executed, the prize in the small hit in the first KT state is given. It is possible to prevent the player from expecting it.

(Explanation of feature unit 022SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the feature unit 022SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 022SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 022SH includes a gaming state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, and the pre-start determination means are realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means can be controlled into an advantageous state, a special state, and a special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state,
For example, it is a small hit game state.

The special state is a state in which the game value is easily given by the special state, for example, the second KT.
State (high probability / low base state). The second KT state is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, and a game state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening. The first KT state (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state) is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, but it is difficult for the game ball to win in the special winning opening. .. That is,
The first KT state is a state in which the game value is hardly given by the special state.

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 022SH, it is possible to control the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and it is possible to control the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state. The advantageous game referred to here is a big hit that shifts to the second KT state after the end of the big hit game state. The gaming state control means can be controlled to the second KT state after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state again after being controlled to the second KT state.

The effect executing means controls the effect mode of the small hit RUSH mode in the second KT state. In the second KT state, it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, and is not controlled to any other effect mode. Further, the small hit RUSH mode is also an effect mode controlled only in the second KT state. That is, when controlled in the small hit RUSH mode,
It is always controlled to the second KT state.

When the effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a plurality of states to which the game value can be given as the state after being controlled to the advantageous state. The time when it is controlled to the advantageous state is the time when it is controlled by this big hit game. The states in which the game value can be given are the second KT state and the next big hit game state. The specific display is the 2nd KT
It is a display corresponding to the existence (occurrence) of the state and the next big hit game state thereafter.

For example, the specific display is an image (hereinafter referred to as “bonus rush icon”) corresponding to the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) and the next big hit game state. Specifically, the specific display includes a plurality of icon images corresponding to the current jackpot, an icon image corresponding to the subsequent second KT state, and an icon image corresponding to the next jackpot to be won in the second KT state. It consists of an icon image.

The display mode of the bonus rush icon may be any shape such as a circle, a square, or a triangle, or may be a display mode with characters or symbols. Each icon image of the bonus rush icon is an image showing a blank when the corresponding state (game) is not completed, and changes to an image with a predetermined color when the corresponding state is completed. The blank icon image corresponding to the current jackpot, the blank icon image corresponding to the second KT state, and the blank icon image corresponding to the next jackpot, which constitute the bonus rush icon, all have the same display mode. It is displayed in.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means can change the display mode of the specific display according to the controlled state among the advantageous state and the plurality of states to which the game value can be given. Is. For example, when the current jackpot is completed, the effect executing means changes the predetermined display mode of the blank icon image corresponding to the current jackpot. Specifically, the effect executing means changes the display mode to indicate a state in which the blank bonus rush icon is colored in red and the blank is filled. The change in the display mode is not limited to filling in the blanks by coloring, and for example, characters such as "done" may be added to the corresponding icon, or the shape of the corresponding icon may be changed. ..

Here, the timing for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon will be described. For example, in the case of a bonus rush icon corresponding to a big hit, the display mode is changed during the ending period of the big hit. However, the timing for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the big hit is not limited to these, and may be during a round game (for example, the final round). Further, in the case of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state, the display mode is changed, for example, during the big hit fanfare period. However, the second
The timing to change the display mode of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the KT state is
Not limited to these, it may be during a round game (for example, the first round).

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, there are a plurality of different types of display modes for the specific display.
The effect executing means can display a specific display of a display mode corresponding to a controlled state among a state including an advantageous state and a plurality of states to which a game value can be given. Specifically, when the jackpot is completed, the effect executing means changes the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the jackpot to a display mode (for example, red) corresponding to the jackpot.

Further, when the second KT state ends, the effect executing means displays a display mode (for example, indicating that the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state is controlled to the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). , Yellow).

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means has a specific display of a specific mode corresponding to the controlled advantageous state and a specific display of a predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states to which the game value can be given. It can be displayed. The specific display of the specific mode is, for example, an icon image in a state where red or yellow is filled. The specific display of the predetermined mode is, for example, a blank icon image. The effect executing means can display a bonus rush icon including an icon image in a state where the red color is filled and a blank icon image.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means can display the specific display over a plurality of states among the advantageous states and the plurality of states to which the game value can be given. Specifically, the effect executing means specifically displays the current big hit game state, the second KT state after the current big hit, and the next big hit game state, that is, across a plurality of game states. Can be displayed. Further, the effect executing means can always display a specific display such as during variable display, during symbol stop display, while waiting for variable display, during small hit game, and during big hit game.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means can display the game value given in the advantageous state and the game value given in the special state in the advantageous state and the special state. The game value is, for example, a prize ball. Specifically, the production execution means spans the current big hit game state, the second KT state after this big hit, and the next big hit game state, that is, across a plurality of game states, and is a general prize. The number of balls can be displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, it is suggested that when the effect executing means is controlled to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state, it is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state after the special state. Perform the production. Specifically, the production execution means will be used in the next big hit game.
After the next big hit game, a suggestion effect suggesting that the second KT state is controlled again is executed. The suggestive effect is, for example, a success / failure effect that indicates the result of either success or failure, and specifically, a battle effect or a stage-developing effect.

Further, the effect executing means displays a specific mode of a predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which the game value can be given as the state after being controlled to the later advantageous state in response to the effect result of the suggestion effect. It can be displayed. For example, when the effect result of the suggestion effect is an effect result indicating success, the effect execution means adds a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon and displays it in the next big hit game. On the other hand, when the effect result of the suggestion effect is an effect result indicating a failure, the effect execution means does not add a blank icon image in the next big hit game.

For example, the effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect within the same round (for example, in the fifth round), add a blank icon image, and display the effect. However, the effect executing means may execute the suggestion effect over a plurality of rounds and add a blank icon image. For example, the suggestion effect may be executed in the 5th round, and the icon image may be added in the 6th round.
Further, the effect executing means may execute the suggestion effect over a plurality of rounds.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, a common number of round games is executed in the advantageous state before being controlled by the special state and the advantageous state after being controlled by the special state. That is, the same number of round games are executed between the current jackpot and the next jackpot. The effect execution means is controlled by the advantageous state this time and when it is controlled by the advantageous state later.
It is possible to display a specific display of a common display mode. Specifically, the effect executing means displays the icon image corresponding to each of the current big hit and the next big hit in a common display mode with red.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the variable display executing means includes variable display of the first identification information and variable display.
The variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel. Specifically, the variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel. The game state control means can control to an advantageous state when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. The specific display result is, for example, a display result indicating a big hit (big hit symbol).
Is. Therefore, the game state control means controls the game state to the big hit game state when the display result indicating the big hit is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player than the variable display of the first identification information. For example, in the feature unit 022SH, the first
The jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol is more likely to execute the jackpot that shifts to the second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state or the jackpot with a large number of rounds than the jackpot based on the variable display of the special symbol.

When the effect executing means is controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information, if the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed. To erase. Since the specific display is mainly displayed in the second KT state in which the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variable display of the first identification information during the display of the specific display. It is irregular.

Here, as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information, the second K after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
When the jackpot to shift to the T state is derived and displayed, the specific display is not erased. In other words, the effect executing means deletes the specific display only when the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is the derivation display of the jackpot excluding the jackpot that shifts to the second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. I decided to.

Here, the timing for erasing the specific display is, for example, the fanfare period of the big hit. For example, even when a big hit game based on the variable display of the first identification information is performed, since the control of the second KT state is completed by this big hit (the small hit RUSH mode is completed), the icon image is displayed during the fanfare period. , The display mode indicating that the second KT state has been controlled (for example, yellow) may be changed, and then the bonus rush icon may be erased (during the fanfare period). Further, the timing for erasing the specific display is not limited to the big hit game based on the variable display of the first identification information, and may be during the round game or as the ending period. When erasing the specific display during the round game, for example, a suggestion effect may be performed, an effect result indicating a failure may be displayed as the effect result of the suggestion effect, and then the specific display may be deleted.

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means can display the specific display before the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, when the variable display this time is a big hit, the effect executing means displays that the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state is controlled to the second KT state during the variable display. Aspect (
For example, it can be changed to yellow).

Further, in the feature unit 022SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display is a display result indicating that the display result of the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state for the variable display that has not been started yet. The determination made by the pre-start determination means is, for example, a look-ahead determination, and specifically, is the same as various determinations (big hit determination, big hit type determination, fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) performed when starting the open variable display. It is a judgment of the contents. The determination timing performed by the pre-start determination means is a timing before the timing for performing the various determinations.

The effect executing means can display a specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means.
For example, if there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination, the effect execution means has a bonus corresponding to the second KT state before the variable display of the hold memory is started.
It is possible to change the icon image of the rush icon to a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that the icon image is controlled to the second KT state.

(Regarding the game state and transition of the production mode after the big hit game in the feature unit 022SH)
FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game in the feature unit 022SH. FIG. 12-1 shows the feature portion 020SH shown in FIG. 11-1.
Compared with the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game in, the type of the big hit is different. In the description of FIG. 12-1, the points different from those of FIG. 11-1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the feature unit 022SH, there are five types of jackpots: 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, 6R probability variation jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. There is. 10R probability variation jackpot A has a high probability / second KT after the jackpot game.
It is a big hit to shift to the state. The 10R probability variation jackpot B and the 6R probability variation jackpot are jackpots that shift to the high probability / first KT state after the jackpot game. 10R normal jackpot and 6R
The normal jackpot is a jackpot that shifts to the low probability / first KT state after the jackpot game. 10
In the case of a big hit of R, the same prize ball can be obtained in any big hit. The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 022SH has specifications that make it easier to obtain more prize balls than the feature section 020SH described above.

Next, the ratio at which the type of each jackpot is determined in each game state will be described. For example, in the normal gaming state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the first special symbol is variably displayed. In the jackpot type judgment based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening (that is,
In the normal game state), the 6R normal jackpot is 35%, the 6R probability variation jackpot is 30%, and the 10R probability variation jackpot A is 35%.

On the other hand, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the high probability / 1st KT state, and the low probability / 2nd KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the 2nd starting winning opening, and the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is performed. Will be.
In the jackpot type judgment based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening (that is, low probability / 1st KT)
(In the state, high probability / first KT state, and low probability / second KT state), the ratio of 10R normal jackpot is 35%, 10R probability variation jackpot B is 15%, and 10R probability variation jackpot A is 50%, respectively. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 022SH has a higher ratio of being determined to be the 10R probability variation jackpot A than the above-mentioned feature unit 020SH, so that the specifications are such that more prize balls can be easily obtained. There is.

Further, a common effect is executed during the jackpot game depending on whether the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot B is executed or the jackpot game based on the 10R normal jackpot is executed. Specifically, a combination of common decorative symbols is derived and displayed for the 10R probability variation jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, and a common jackpot effect is executed even during each jackpot game. and,
After the jackpot game, it is controlled to the common Chantime mode.

As a result, the player cannot determine the type of the executed jackpot between the 10R probability variable jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, and the gaming state controlled by the jackpot game (high probability / high base state and low probability /). It is possible to prevent the player from discriminating even in any of the high base states). Therefore, in the feature unit 022SH, the player can control the game state regardless of which mode the Chantime mode is started from, not limited to the so-called first hit, which is the transition from the normal mode to the Chantime mode. Can be made indistinguishable.

(About the jackpot type judgment table of the feature unit 022SH)
FIG. 12-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot type determination table of the feature unit 022SH. FIG. 12-2 (A) is a jackpot type determination table when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. FIG. 12-2 (B) is a jackpot type determination table when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), there are three types of jackpots when executing the variable display of the first special symbol: 10R probability variation jackpot A, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. One of the big hits will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), the jackpot types when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed include 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, and 10R normal jackpot. One of the three types of jackpots will be decided. FIG. 12
In both (A) and (B) of -2, the rate at which each jackpot type is determined is constant regardless of the set value. Further, in both (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2, the ratio determined for the probabilistic jackpot is 65%, and the proportion determined for the normal jackpot is 35%.

Hereinafter, (A) and (B) in FIG. 12-2 will be compared and described. The 10R probability variation jackpot A is (
(B) is easier to determine than A). Specifically, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is 35% in (A) and 50% in (B). Further, in (A), 6R probability variation jackpot B can be selected and 10R probability variation jackpot B cannot be selected, but in (B), 10R probability variation jackpot B cannot be selected.
Can be selected, and 6R probability variation jackpot cannot be selected. Also, for normal jackpots,
In (A), 6R normal jackpot can be selected (10R normal jackpot cannot be selected), and (B).
), 10R normal jackpot can be selected (6R normal jackpot cannot be selected). Therefore, the jackpot type determination using (B) is more likely to be determined as a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than that of (A). That is, the variable display of the second special symbol is a variable display that is more advantageous to the player than the variable display of the first special symbol.

(Bonus rush icon control process at the start of big hit)
Next, the process of displaying the bonus rush icon at the start of the big hit or changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3. FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the bonus rush icon control process at the start of the big hit. The bonus rush icon control process at the start of the big hit is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) has been received (step 022SHS11). If the jackpot start designation command has not been received (step 022SHS11: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes as it is.

On the other hand, when the jackpot start designation command is received (step 022SHS11: YE).
S), that is, when a big hit occurs, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a 10R probability variation big hit A (step 022SHS12). In the case of 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS12: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is in step 0.
Move to 22SHS14. If it is not 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS1)
2: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13).

When it is not a big hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13: N)
O) That is, in the case of a big hit based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU
120 determines whether or not the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022).
SHS14). If the bonus rush icon is not displayed (step 022SH)
S14: NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS15), and ends a series of processes.

On the other hand, when the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS14:
YES), of the bonus rush icons, the 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH mode)
The display change effect for changing the icon image corresponding to is changed to the display mode (yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled is executed (step 022SHS16), and a series of processes is completed.

In step 022SHS13, when it is a big hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS17). Bonus·
When the rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS17: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes.

On the other hand, when the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS17:
YES), that is, for example, in the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), when the game is controlled by an irregular big hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CP.
The U120 erases the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS18) and ends a series of processes.

When the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A is executed by the above-mentioned process, the bonus rush icon can be displayed during the fanfare period of the jackpot. again,
When the big hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the small hit RUSH mode, the display mode indicating that the bonus rush icon is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode during the round game (for example, yellow). ) Can be changed. Also, small hit R
When an irregular jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the USH mode, the bonus rush icon can be erased during the fanfare period.

(Bonus rush icon control processing during round game)
Next, the process of adding a blank of the bonus rush icon during the round game will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4. FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the bonus rush icon control process during the round game. The bonus rush icon control process during the round game is a process executed in the big hit middle effect process of S176 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening display command is received (step 022SHS31). When the large winning opening opening display command has not been received (step 022SHS31: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes as it is. When the large winning opening opening display command is received (step 022SHS31: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current big hit is a big hit when the small hit RUSH mode is controlled. (Step 022
SHS32).

When the current big hit is not the big hit when the small hit RUSH mode is controlled (step 022SHS32: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes.
On the other hand, when the big hit this time is a big hit when it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (
Step 022SHS32: YES), it is determined whether or not the round game is the fifth round (step 022SHS33). The effect control CPU 120 is based on the value of the round number counter indicating the number of jackpot rounds counted by the CPU 103.
It may be determined whether or not it is the fifth round, or it may be determined whether or not it is the fifth round by counting the number of times when the large winning opening opening display command is received.

When the round game is not the fifth round (step 022SHS33: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the round game is the fifth round (step 022SHS33: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is a bonus.
It is determined whether or not the rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS34). When the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS34: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes.

On the other hand, when the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS34:
YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS35). 10R Probability change jackpot A (step 0)
22SHS35: YES), the effect control CPU 120 adds and displays a bonus rush icon by setting the execution of a success effect as a suggestion effect (step 022S).
HS36), the series of processes is completed. On the other hand, when it is not the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS35: NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the failure effect as a suggestion effect (step 022SHS37), and ends a series of processes.

By the above-mentioned processing, in the jackpot game in the small hit RUSH mode, if the jackpot this time is the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the success effect can be executed as a suggestion effect, while the jackpot this time is the 10R probability variation jackpot B or If it is a 10R normal jackpot, a failure effect can be executed as a suggestion effect.

(Bonus rush icon control processing during the ending period)
Next, the bonus rush icon control process of the process when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed during the ending period will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-5. FIG. 12-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the bonus rush icon control process during the ending period. The bonus rush icon control process during the ending period is a process executed in the ending effect process of S177 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS51). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes as it is. When the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS51: YES), the effect control CPU 120 displays the icon image corresponding to the current jackpot among the bonus rush icons in a display mode (for example, red) indicating the completion of the jackpot. The display change effect to be changed to is set to be executed (step 022SHS52).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS53). When the big hit this time is the 10R probability variation big hit A (step 022SHS53: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is the small hit RUSH.
The ending effect indicating the transition to the mode is set to be executed (step 022SHS54), and a series of processes is completed. On the other hand, when the current jackpot is not the 10R probability variation jackpot A (step 022SHS53: NO), that is, the current jackpot is the 10R probability variation jackpot B or 10R.
In the case of a normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the ending effect indicating the transition to the Chantime mode (step 022SHS55), and ends a series of processes.
The bonus rush icon is not displayed in the Chantime mode.

By the above-mentioned processing, the bonus rush icon can be changed to a display mode (for example, red) indicating the completion of the jackpot during the ending period of the jackpot game. Also, 1
In the case of 0R probability variation big hit A, the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed even in the small hit RUSH mode. Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot B or the normal jackpot, the bonus rush icon can be hidden in the Chantime mode.

(Example of transition of production mode and jackpot production screen)
Next, an example of the transition of the effect mode and the effect screen of the jackpot will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-6 to 12-8. FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen from the normal mode to the small hit RUSH mode. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen from the small hit RUSH mode to the Chantime mode. FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen when the small hit RUSH mode continues.

FIG. 12-6 (A) shows a variable display in the normal mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 has a decorative symbol 022SH100 and a first, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol.
The small symbol 022SH101 is variably displayed. In displaying the screen shown in (A)
The effect control CPU 120 has a variable display result (fixed decorative pattern) of a decorative pattern and a variable decorative pattern based on a display result, a variation pattern, and a game state specified by an effect control command received from the main board 11. Determine whether or not to execute various effects such as display mode, reach effect, various notice effects, and effect mode according to the game state, the mode, and the execution start timing.
Based on the decision result, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. Further, in (A), the active display 022SH110 is displayed in the central region below the image display device 5. In (A), when the variable display period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 12-6 (B) is a decorative symbol 02 showing a 10R probability variation jackpot A in the normal mode.
The screen when 2SH100 is derived and displayed is shown. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the first small symbol 022SH101 are stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol "7,7,7" which is a combination showing the 10R probability variation jackpot A. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120 may be, for example, from the effect control pattern to the decorative pattern 022S.
Corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the H100 (and the first small symbol 022SH101) has been read, or that a command has been received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol 022SH100 should be stopped and displayed. Then, the final decorative symbol 022SH100, which is the display result of the decorative symbol 022SH100, is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 12-6 (C) shows a screen of the fanfare period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH105 showing a 10R probability variation jackpot A and a bonus rush icon 022SH120. The bonus rush icon 022SH120 has three icon images 0 indicating blanks.
It consists of 22SH120a-120c. Three icon images 022SH120a-120
c indicates that there is a state in which the game value for three times is given, that is, the current jackpot, the small hit RUSH mode after the end of the current jackpot, and the next jackpot. In displaying the screen shown in (C), the effect control CPU 120 responds to, for example, receiving a jackpot start designation command from the main board 11, and receives a jackpot notification image 022SH105 or a bonus.
Display the rush icon 022SH120.

FIG. 12-6 (D) shows a screen during the fifth round game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a round notification image 022SH106 that notifies that it is the fifth round of the 10R probability variation jackpot A. Further, in (D), the total prize ball number display 022SH130 is displayed. The total prize ball number display 022SH130 indicates the total number of prize balls in the consecutive chan including the small hit RUSH mode. In addition, the total prize ball number display 022SH1
30 may indicate the fanfare period shown in FIG. 12-6 (C). Also, (D)
In the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, a notification image including the character "right-handed" is displayed as a notification image corresponding to the right-handed notification. In displaying the screen shown in (D)
The effect control CPU 120 displays the round notification image 022SH106 in response to receiving, for example, a display command during opening of the large winning opening from the main board 11.

FIG. 12-6 (E) shows a screen of the ending period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small hit RUSH transition notification image 022SH107 indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled, and a bonus rush icon 0.
A colored image is displayed on the icon image 022SH120a (first from the bottom) of the 22SH120. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120a is a color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot has been completed. In displaying the screen shown in (E), the effect control CPU 120 responds to, for example, receiving a big hit end designation command from the main board 11, and receives a small hit RUSH transition notification image 022SH107 and an icon image 022SH1.
A colored image is displayed on 20a.

As described above, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game. Further, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed in a display mode (for example, red) corresponding to the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 12-6 (F) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 has a decorative symbol 022SH100 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.
And the second small symbol 022SH102 is variably displayed. The bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed over a plurality of gaming states, that is, a jackpot gaming state and a second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). Further, in (F), in the area on the right side of the active display 022SH110 of the image display device 5, the hold display 022SH11 indicating the second hold storage is displayed.
1 is displayed.

FIG. 12-6 (G) shows a screen in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 has a decorative symbol 022SH100 and a second small symbol 0.
The 22SH102 is stopped and displayed with a definite symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small hit game.

FIG. 12-6 (H) shows a screen during the small hit game in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small hit game state, when there is a prize in the special prize opening, the image display device 5 displays a prize effect image 022SH131 indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls). (H
) Indicates, for example, that two balls have been won in the special winning opening and two prize balls (a total of 20 balls have been paid out) have been paid out. Further, the total prize ball number display 022SH 130 indicates the total number of prize balls in the big hit and the prize balls in the small hit RUSH mode, and can be displayed over the big hit game state and the small hit RUSH mode (second KT state). Is. The total prize ball number display 022SH130 shows a number added by 20 balls as compared with (G) in FIG. 12-6. After this, (of FIG. 12-7
Transition to the screen of either I) or (I) of FIG. 12-8.

FIG. 12-7 (I) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode.

In FIG. 12-7 (J), the decorative symbol 022SH100 indicating either the probabilistic jackpot (10R probabilistic jackpot A, 10R probabilistic jackpot B) or the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot) is derived and displayed in the small hit RUSH mode. Shows the screen when it is done. Specifically, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are a combination indicating that there is a possibility of either a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot.
It is stopped and displayed at "2, 2". In (J), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (K).

FIG. 12-7 (K) shows a screen of the fanfare period of the big hit game controlled in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 has a jackpot notification image 022SH115 indicating that there is a possibility of either a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot, and an icon image 022SH120b of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 (2 from the bottom).
A colored image is displayed in the second). The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled. again,
The bonus rush icon 022SH120 is continuously displayed even after the transition from the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) to the big hit gaming state. Also, the jackpot notification image 022
SH115 indicates that the character has a bow and arrow, and in the big hit game, a suggestion effect using the bow and arrow is performed, which suggests that the small hit RUSH mode may be controlled after the big hit game.

In this way, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed over a plurality of gaming states, that is, the previous jackpot gaming state, the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), and the current jackpot gaming state. Further, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game. Also, Bonus Rush Icon 022SH12
0 (icon image 022SH120b) is displayed in a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode (second KT state) is controlled.

FIG. 12-7 (L) shows a screen during the fifth round game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a suggestion effect image 022SH116 suggesting that the small hit RUSH mode may be controlled after the current big hit. For example, the suggestion effect is
There is a success effect in which the displayed character hits the target with a bow and arrow, and a failure effect in which the displayed character cannot hit the target.

FIG. 12-7 (M) shows a screen showing a failure as an effect result in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a failure effect image 022SH117 in which the displayed character could not hit the target with a bow and arrow. Failure production image 02
By displaying 2SH117, it is suggested to the player that the small hit RUSH mode is not controlled after this big hit game.

In the 5th round, the failure effect image 022SH117 is displayed, and in the subsequent rounds and the ending period, an image showing success is displayed. The revival effect (controlled to the small hit RUSH mode after this big hit game). It may be possible to execute the effect (showing). In addition, as a suggestion effect, a blank icon image is likely to be added, or
You may prepare an effect that is unlikely to be added, and execute one of the effects selected by the judgment.

FIG. 12-7 (N) shows a screen of the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 contains an image in which the Chantime mode transition notification image 022SH118 indicating that the image is controlled to the Chantime mode and a blank (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 are filled. It is displayed. Bonus Rush Icon 02
2SH120 icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) is displayed with a colored image. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot has been completed. In this way, the bonus rush icon 022SH
The display mode of 120 changes according to the progress of the game.

In the feature unit 022SH, the jackpot that can be won in the small hit RUSH mode is a jackpot of 10 rounds having a common number of rounds. Therefore, the game value given to the player by the big hit game in the small hit RUSH mode is common. For this reason, in the feature unit 022SH, when the icon image of the bonus rush icon 022SH is set to the display mode indicating the completion of the big hit, the display mode is uniformly "red" regardless of the big hit type.

In addition, the icon image 022SH120 of the bonus rush icon 022SH120
Of a to 120c, the bottom icon image 022SH120a and the top icon image 022SH120c are colored red, and the middle icon image 022SH120b is colored yellow. Therefore, when displaying the icon images 022SH 120a to 120c (for example, see (C) in FIG. 12-6), the bottom icon image 022SH
120a, top icon image 022SH120c, and middle icon image 02
The 2SH120b may be displayed in a different display mode from the beginning (from a blank state). For example, the icon image 022SH120b in the middle and another icon image 022SH120
A display mode in which the display area is larger than that of a and 120c may be used. As a result, even if each icon image 022SH120a to 120c is in a blank state, the player is asked whether the icon image corresponds to the big hit or the icon image corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode depending on the display mode of the blank. Can be suggested.

FIG. 12-7 (O) shows a variable display in the Chantime mode. In particular,
The decorative symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, the Chan Time mode is
It is controlled in the case of the first KT state (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state). In Chantime mode, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is
It has been erased.

Next, FIG. 12-8 will be described. (I) to (L) of FIG. 12-8 are (1) of FIG. 12-7.
It is the same screen as the screens shown in I) to (L). Therefore, the description of FIGS. 12-8 (I) to (L) will be omitted.

FIG. 12-8 (M) shows a screen showing success as an effect result in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a success effect image 022SH127 in which the displayed character was able to hit the target with a bow and arrow. In addition, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 has two icon images 022SH120d indicating blanks.
120e is additionally displayed. These two icon images 022SH120d, 12
For 0e, a new state has been added in which the small hit RUSH mode after the end of the big hit (after the end of the second big hit) and the next big hit (the third big hit) can be given the game value for two times thereafter. Show that. Thus, in the bonus rush icon 022SH120,
Icon image 022SH120a, 1 of display mode (red or yellow) corresponding to the completed game
20b and the icon images 022SH120c to 120e of the blank display mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states to which the game value can be given thereafter can be displayed at the same time.

FIG. 12-8 (N) shows a screen of the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small hit RUSH continuous notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and a bonus rush icon 022SH12.
A colored image is displayed on the icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) of 0. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot has been completed.

FIG. 12-8 (O) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (P), every time the 10R probability variation big hit A is executed in the small hit RUSH mode, the bonus rush icon 022SH120
Two icon images 022SH120f, 120g indicating blanks are additionally displayed in.

In the explanation of FIG. 12-8, it is not specified that it is the 10R probability variation jackpot A until the result of the suggestion effect is displayed, but when the variable display result is derived and displayed, it is the 10R probability variation jackpot A. You may specify that. That is, in the description of FIG. 12-8, in the variable display determined to be the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the combination "2, 2," indicating that the decorative symbol 022SH100 may be either the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot. Stop display with "2" and display
During the jackpot game, the success effect image 022SH127 is displayed by the suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the variable display determined to be the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the decorative symbol 022SH100 shows the 10R probability variation jackpot A. The stop display may be performed by the combination "7,7,7".

In this case, the timing for adding the two icon images 120d and 120e to the bonus rush icon 022SH 120 may be, for example, a fanfare period, a round game, or an ending period. Further, in this case, although the combination "7,7,7" of the decorative symbol 022SH100 indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot A is stopped and displayed, before the two icon images 120d and 120e are added to the bonus rush icon 022SH120, Suggestion effects may be performed. In this case, since it is clear that a production showing success is performed as a result production in the suggestion production, the player
You can play while watching the suggestive effects with confidence. On the other hand, since the combination "7,7,7" indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot A has already been stopped and displayed, two icon images 120d and 120e have been added to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 without any suggestion effect. You may let me.

Further, when it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot A is performed, it is determined whether to perform an effect that clearly indicates that it is a 10R probability variation jackpot A or an effect that is not specified, and one of the effects determined by the determination is performed. You may do it.

(Bonus rush icon control processing in variable display)
Next, a process for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon in the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-9. Figure 12-9 shows the bonus in variable display.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rush icon control process. The bonus rush icon control process in the variable display is a process executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-9, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit RUSH mode is in progress (step 022SHS71). When not in the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS71: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes as it is. When the small hit RUSH mode is in effect (step 022SHS71: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination (step 022SHS72).

When there is a hold memory that is determined to be a big hit (step 022SHS72: Y)
ES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon is changed (step 022SHS73). In the determination of step 022SHS73, FIG. 12-
The bonus rush icon display change determination table shown in 10 (A) is used.

(About the bonus / rush icon display change determination table)
Here, the bonus rush icon display change determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-10. FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bonus rush icon display change determination table. FIG. 12-10 (A) is a table used for determining whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the hold storage is changed.

Specifically, FIG. 12-10 (A) is a table showing the execution rate of the bonus / rush icon display change for each jackpot type, which is used when it is determined by the look-ahead determination that the jackpot is a jackpot. .. More specifically, in the table of FIG. 12-10 (A),
The "look-ahead determination result" indicates the type of jackpot based on the look-ahead determination. Further, the "bonus / rush icon display change execution rate" indicates "yes" that changes the display and "none" that does not change the display.

For example, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the ratio of the display change of the bonus rush icon is "25/100". Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, the ratio of the display change of the bonus rush icon is "10/100". Therefore, when the hold memory of the big hit is stored, the 10R probability variable big hit A is better, that is, the case where the small hit RUSH mode is continued after the big hit game is the case where the small hit RUSH mode is not continued after the big hit game. It is easier to change the display of the bonus rush icon.

Returning to FIG. 12-9, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to change the display of the bonus rush icon as a result of the determination in step 022SHS73 (step 0).
22SHS74). When the display of the bonus rush icon is not changed (step 0)
22SHS74: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes.

When changing the display of the bonus rush icon (Step 022SHS74: YE)
S), the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the corresponding icon image to the small hit RUSH.
A display change effect for changing to a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that the mode has been controlled is set to be executed (step 022SHS75), and a series of processes is completed.

In step 022SHS72, when there is no hold storage determined to be a jackpot (step 022SHS72: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot display result is derived and displayed in the current variable display. (Step 022SHS7
6). When the display result of the big hit is not derived and displayed in this variable display (step 02)
2SHS76: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes.

On the other hand, when the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed in this variable display (step 02).
2SHS76: YES), bonus at the stage of hold storage before the start of this variable display
Determining whether the display of the rush icon has been changed (step 022SHS77)
.. When the display of the bonus rush icon has been changed at the stage of hold memory (step 0)
22SHS77: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the display of the bonus rush icon has not been changed at the stage of hold memory (step 022S)
HS77: NO), determine whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon has changed (step 0)
22SHS78), the process proceeds to step 022SHS74. In the determination of step 022SHS78, the bonus rush icon display change determination table shown in FIG. 12-10 (B) is used.

Here, FIG. 12-10 (B) is a table used when determining whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the variable display is changed. Specifically, FIG. 12-10 (B) shows the execution rate of the bonus / rush icon display change for each jackpot type, which is used when the jackpot determination corresponding to the variable display determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. The table shown. More specifically, in the table of FIG. 12-10 (B), the "big hit determination result" indicates the big hit type when the variable display this time is a big hit. Further, the "bonus / rush icon display change execution rate" indicates "yes" that changes the display and "none" that does not change the display.

For example, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the rate at which the display change of the bonus rush icon is performed is "10/100". Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, the ratio of the display change of the bonus rush icon is "25/100". Therefore, during the variable display from which the display result of the big hit is derived, the 10R probability variable big hit B or the 10R normal big hit is better (when the small hit RUSH mode ends after the big hit game).
The display change of the bonus rush icon is more likely to occur than the 10R probability variation jackpot A (compared to the case where the small hit RUSH mode continues after the jackpot game).

By using the tables shown in FIGS. 12-10 (A) and 12-10, it is possible to suggest the continuation or termination of the small hit RUSH mode depending on the timing at which the bonus rush icon is displayed. Specifically, if the display mode of the bonus rush icon changes while it is stored on hold, there is a high possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will continue.
If the display mode of the bonus rush icon changes during the variable display, the small hit RUS
It can be suggested that the H mode is likely to end.

In the above description, it is suggested that the small hit RUSH mode may continue depending on whether the information regarding the variable display of the target is in hold storage or variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regarding the information related to the variable display of the target, the small hit RUSH mode continues depending on whether the variable display result (big hit symbol) is before the derivation display (during hold storage or variable display) or after the derivation display (during the big hit game). You may suggest the possibility. Specifically, there is a high possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will continue before the derivation display of the variable display result (big hit symbol).
On the other hand, it may be suggested that the small hit RUSH mode is likely to end after the derivation display of the variable display result.

(Screen transition when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-11, the transition of the effect screen when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed during the variable display will be described. FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the effect screen when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed during the variable display.

FIG. 12-11 (A) shows the active display 022S in the small hit RUSH mode.
The screen when the variable display corresponding to H110 is started is shown. Further, in (A), a hold display 022SH111 indicating the second hold storage is displayed. Hold display 022S shown in (A)
H111 is a display mode different from the normal display mode, and specifically, is a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. The hold storage corresponding to the hold display 022SH111 is, for example, the hold storage determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination.

FIG. 12-11 (B) shows a screen during variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 similar to (A). In (B), an image in which yellow is added to the icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that the big hit game is performed (the small hit RUSH mode is terminated or interrupted). The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is, for example, a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled.

FIG. 12-11 (C) shows a screen in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small hit game. After (C), it is controlled to the small hit game state, and when the small hit game is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (D).

FIG. 12-11 (D) shows the active display 022S in the small hit RUSH mode.
The screen when the variable display corresponding to H113 is started is shown. Specifically, (D) shows a screen when the high expectation hold display 022SH111 moves to the active display 022SH113 and the variable display is started.

In FIG. 12-11 (E), the decorative symbol 022SH100 indicating either the probabilistic jackpot (10R probabilistic jackpot A, 10R probabilistic jackpot B) or the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot) is derived and displayed in the small hit RUSH mode. Shows the screen when it is done. In (E), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (F).

FIG. 12-11 (F) shows a screen of a fanfare period in a jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH115 indicating that there is a possibility of either a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot.

FIG. 12-11 (G) shows the result of the suggestion effect performed in the fifth round.
Show a screen showing success. Specifically, the type of jackpot being executed is 10R probability variation jackpot A.
In the case of, the success effect image 127 is displayed as shown in (G). If the type of jackpot being executed is 10R probability variation jackpot B or 10R normal jackpot, in (G),
As shown in FIG. 12-7 (M), the failure effect image 022SH117 is displayed. Also,(
In G), two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blanks are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120.

FIG. 12-11 (H) shows a screen of an ending period in a jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small hit RUSH continuous notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and a bonus rush icon 022SH1.
A colored image is displayed on the icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) of 20. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot (second jackpot) has been completed.

The symbol variation time in the variation display of FIGS. 12-11 (A) to (C) is, for example, 1 second. That is, the screen transitions (A) to (C) are performed in a short time. Therefore, (B)
The timing at which the effect of coloring the icon image 022SH120b shown in (A) may be performed substantially at the same time as the start of the variable display, that is, the timing at which the screen shown in (A) is displayed.

In addition, the timing of adding a color (yellow) to the icon image 022SH120b is
For example, it may be the timing when the hold storage corresponding to the hold display 022SH111 is stored, or it may be the timing after the hold display 022SH111 shifts to the active display 022SH113 and the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH113 is started.

Further, the fanning effect may be performed before the effect of coloring the icon image 022SH120b. For example, the fanning effect includes an action effect that acts on the icon image 022SH120b. After this action effect, an effect of coloring the icon image 022SH120b may be performed. In addition, after the fanning effect, a so-called sloppy effect may be performed in which the icon image 022SH120b is not colored.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the bonus rush icon 022S
With H120, it can be suggested that there are a plurality of states (second KT state and the next big hit game) in which the game value can be given as the state after the big hit game in the big hit game. For example, in this big hit game, after this big hit game, there are at least two or more states that are advantageous to the player, including the second KT state and the next big hit game (in this embodiment, this big hit). It can be suggested that there are three states: the game, the second KT state, and the next big hit game). Therefore, in this big hit game, it can be clarified that a state advantageous to the player can occur thereafter, so that the player can be further uplifted during the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit.

(Modification example 1 of feature unit 022SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 022SH, the timing for adding the icon images 022SH120d, 120e showing two blanks to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is set to be during the round game in the 10R probability variation jackpot A. In place of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 1, the timing of adding the icon images 022SH120d, 120e showing two blanks to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed in a variable display. The case where the result (big hit symbol) is before being derived and displayed will be described.

Specifically, when the effect executing means according to the feature unit 022SH is determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination, and this reserved memory is determined to be a big hit to shift to the second KT state after the big hit, Before the variable display of this hold memory is started, a blank icon image is added to the bonus rush icon. If the variable display this time is a big hit and the big hit shifts to the second KT state after the big hit, the effect executing means may add a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon during the variable display. ..

Next, the transition of the effect screen according to the first modification will be described. Figure 12-12 shows the bonus.
It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen which concerns on modification 1 when the display mode of a rush icon is changed. FIG. 12-12 (A) shows a screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 is started in the small hit RUSH mode. Also,(
In A), a hold display 022SH111 indicating the second hold storage is displayed. The hold display 022SH111 shown in (A) is a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high. Hold display 022
The hold memory corresponding to SH111 is the hold memory determined to be the 10R probability variation jackpot A by the look-ahead determination.

FIG. 12-12 (B) shows a screen during variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 similar to (A). In (B), bonus rush icon 022SH12
Two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blanks are additionally displayed at 0. As a result, after that, it will be controlled to the big hit game of 10R probability variable big hit A, and
It can be suggested to the player that the small hit RUSH mode will continue.

FIG. 12-12 (C) shows a screen in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed during the small hit RUSH mode.

In FIG. 12-12 (D), the high expectation hold display 022SH111 is the active display 02.
2 The screen when the variable display is started by moving to SH113 is shown. In (D), when the variable display period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E).

FIG. 12-12 (E) shows a screen when the decorative symbol 022SH100 indicating the 10R probability variation big hit A is derived and displayed in the small hit RUSH mode. In (E), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (F).

FIG. 12-12 (F) shows a screen of the fanfare period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a colored image on the jackpot notification image 022SH105 showing the 10R probability variation jackpot A and the icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120. ing. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled.

FIG. 12-12 (G) shows a screen during the fifth round game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a round notification image 022SH106 that notifies that it is the fifth round of the 10R probability variation jackpot A.

FIG. 12-12 (H) shows a screen of the ending period in the jackpot game of 10R probability variation jackpot A. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a small hit RUSH continuous notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 (third from the bottom). ) Is displayed as a colored image. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot has been completed.

The symbol variation time in the variation display of FIGS. 12-12 (A) to (C) is, for example, 1 second. That is, the screen transitions (A) to (C) are performed in a short time. Therefore, (B)
The timing of adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e shown in (A) may be substantially the same as the start of the variable display, that is, the timing at which the screen shown in (A) is displayed.

Further, the timing of adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e may be, for example, the timing of storing the hold storage corresponding to the hold display 022SH111, or the hold display 022SH111 shifts to the active display 022SH113. Active display 022SH113 It may be the timing after the corresponding variable display is started.

Also, before performing the effect of adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e,
You may perform a fanning effect. For example, the fanning effect is the bonus rush icon 022SH.
Includes an action effect that acts on 120. After this action effect, two icon images 022SH
An effect of adding 120d and 120e may be performed. In addition, after the fanning effect, a so-called sloppy effect may be performed in which the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e are not added.

(Variation example 2 of the feature portion 022SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 022SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 022 is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 022SH to a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine. Since the pachinko gaming machine of the one-kind and two-kind mixed type is shown in the above-mentioned modification 1 of the feature portion 020SH, detailed description thereof will be omitted and only necessary points will be described.

In the one-kind and two-kind mixed type gaming machine, the small hit probability is, for example, about 1/100 in the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening. Further, even if the small hit game is executed based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the game ball rarely wins in the special variable winning ball device 17, and even if it wins, it is specified. It rarely passes through the region (V region). That is, it can hardly be expected that the game value will be given by the small hit game based on the winning of the first starting winning opening.

On the other hand, in the judgment based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit probability is, for example, about 1.
/ 7 (≈14 / 100). Further, when the small hit game is executed based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 and almost passes through the specific region (V region). .. Therefore, the small hit game based on the winning of the second start winning opening is performed, so that the game is controlled to be substantially in the big hit game state.

In addition, in a one-to-two mixed type pachinko gaming machine, a special state (for example, a time saving state: main) is performed after a big hit game until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, depending on the big hit type (with a predetermined probability). It is controlled to the state where the variable display of the second special figure game is performed). In the second modification, for example, the time is controlled to be shortened until the variable display is executed seven times in the big hit game. Then, in the second special figure game in the special state, the small hit game is performed, so that the game is controlled to the big hit game state again. In the big hit game state, when the second reserved storage determined to be a small hit is stored, the number of big hit games corresponding to the number of the second reserved storage determined to be a small hit is subsequently performed. It will be.

Here, even in a one-kind two-kind mixed type game, the small hit probability is regardless of the set value.
It is constant (first starting port: about 1/100, second starting port: about 1/7). On the other hand, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is about 1/100.
When the set value is "2", it is about 1/95.
When the set value is "3", it is about 1/90.
When the set value is "4", it is about 1/85.
When the set value is "5", it is about 1/80.
When the set value is "6", it is about 1/75.

Therefore, for the so-called first hit (big hit in the normal gaming state: big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol), the difference according to the set value can be increased. On the other hand, for the big hit of the consecutive villa (big hit during the short-time game: big hit via the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol), the difference according to the set value can be reduced. That is, during the time-saving game, the difference in the continuation rate depending on the set value can be reduced.

In the second modification, in the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the existence of a plurality of jackpot gaming states as a state after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The specific display referred to here is a specific display (referred to as a "bonus icon") indicating that a big hit game will be performed thereafter. For example, if the second reserved memory number determined to be a small hit is "2" at the start of the big hit game, the current big hit and the second reserved memory number "2" determined to be a small hit are read ahead.
, And the two big hits according to "" are added to make three big hits. For this reason,
A bonus icon consisting of three icon images is displayed, indicating that three big hits will be made. The timing for displaying the bonus icon may be, for example, the fanfare period of the jackpot game.

At the end of the first jackpot game, the icon image indicating the first blank of the bonus icons may be colored (for example, red) indicating that the current jackpot has been completed. Further, when the second big hit game is completed, the icon image showing the second blank of the bonus icons may be colored (for example, red) indicating that the second big hit is completed. If the second reserved memory number determined to be a small hit is newly stored at the start of the second big hit game, a bonus icon indicating a blank for that amount may be added.

As described above, even in the one-type and two-type mixed type gaming machine, it is possible to display a bonus icon (specific display) corresponding to the existence of a plurality of jackpots thereafter in the jackpot gaming state.

In the second modification, a case where a blank of the bonus icon is displayed according to the second reserved storage number determined to be a small hit and a look-ahead has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the number of big hits can be expected based on the variable display number controlled in the special state (time saving state), the number of blanks of the bonus icon corresponding to the number of big hits is displayed. May be good. For example, when the small hit probability based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set to a probability close to 100%, the variable display number controlled to the special state (time saving state) and the number of big hits that can be expected to occur are almost the same. Since they are the same, the blanks of the bonus icon for the variable display number of times controlled in the special state (the number of times the big hit occurs) may be displayed. Specifically, assuming that only 3 fluctuations are controlled to the special state after the big hit game, the big hit this time and the 3 big hits corresponding to the 3 variable displays in the special state are set at the start of the big hit game. Added 4
A bonus icon indicating four blanks indicating that the jackpot will be performed may be displayed.
Then, during the ending period of this big hit, the blank corresponding to this big hit may be colored to indicate that this big hit has been completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the feature unit 022SH can be expressed as follows. It is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (a kind and two mixed type pachinko gaming machine), and includes a gaming state controlling means for controlling the gaming state and an effect executing means, and the gaming state controlling means is provided. An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), a special state that is different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state), and a special state in which the game value is likely to be given by the special state (for example, time saving). (State), and after being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to the special state, and after being controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the advantageous state. When controlled to the advantageous state, a state in which the game value can be given as a state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
It is possible to display a specific display (for example, a bonus icon) corresponding to the existence of a plurality of.

According to the second modification, the bonus icon corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which the game value can be given as the state after the big hit game is displayed during the big hit game. Thereby, for example, in the first big hit game, it can be suggested that after the big hit game, there are at least two or more states advantageous to the player, including the current big hit and the next big hit game. Therefore, in the first jackpot game, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that a jackpot may occur thereafter, so that the player can be further uplifted during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit in the one-type and two-type mixed type gaming machine.

(Variation example 3 of the feature portion 022SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 022SH, a configuration for displaying a specific display (bonus rush icon) on the image display device 5 has been described. In place of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 3, a configuration in which the specific display is displayed in an area other than the image display device 5 will be described.

For example, it is also possible to display the specific display on a decorative LED, another display device (sub liquid crystal display) different from the image display device 5, and the like. First, a case where a specific display is represented by a decorative LED will be described.

When the specific display is represented by the decorative LEDs, for example, a predetermined number of decorative LEDs are arranged on the game board 2. Specifically, for example, 10 LEDs are arranged vertically side by side on the game board 2. Then, when controlled by the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, in the jackpot game, the three decorative LEDs from the bottom are turned on in white. The white lighting of the three decorative LEDs indicates that there is a state in which the game value for three times is given, that is, this big hit, the small hit RUSH mode after the end of this big hit, and the next big hit. show.

Then, during the ending period of the first big hit, the bottom LED of the three LEDs lit in white is lit in red. This makes it possible to notify that the first big hit has been completed. In addition, when controlled to the big hit gaming state (second big hit) in the small hit RUSH mode, the second LED from the bottom during the fanfare period of the big hit.
Turns on in yellow. As a result, it is possible to notify that the small hit RUSH mode has been controlled.

Furthermore, during the ending period of the second big hit, the third LED from the bottom is turned on in red. This makes it possible to notify that the second big hit has been completed. If the second jackpot is a 10R probability variation jackpot A, the jackpot game state (for example, the fifth round).
Further, the two LEDs, the fourth and fifth LEDs from the bottom, may be turned on in white. By lighting these two LEDs in white, the small hit RUSH mode after the end of the second big hit and 3
It is possible to notify that a state in which the game value for two times is given after the first big hit is newly added.

If the consecutive villas continue, all 10 decorative LEDs may light up. In this case, it is assumed that the lighting of the first round has been completed, and the lighting of the second round is started. Specifically, the display mode of the bottom LED may be changed and turned on. For example, the bottom LED may be lit in a color (for example, purple) indicating the second round of lighting. Further, even when the big hit or small hit RUSH mode is completed after the second round of lighting is performed, the corresponding LEDs may be turned on in a display mode different from that of the first round.

In this way, by expressing the specific display by the decorative LED, the decorative LED can be focused on and the display area of the image display device 5 can be effectively utilized.

Next, a configuration that enables the bonus rush icon to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display will be described. All of the bonus rush icons related to the feature unit 022SH described above may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. Further, the bonus rush icon may be displayed in a different display area depending on the gaming state. For example, the bonus rush icon may be displayed on the image display device 5 in the big hit game state, and may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display in the small hit RUSH mode. As a result, in the small hit RUSH mode, the image display device 5 can pay attention to the prize balls in the small hit game and the cumulative number of prize balls in the continuous chan, and in the big hit game state, the bonus rush icon. Can be noticed. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the image display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display.

(Variation example 4 of the feature portion 022SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment according to the feature unit 022SH, the display mode of the bonus rush icon indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled is set to one display mode (for example, yellow). In the modified example 4, the small hit R
A case where a plurality of display modes can be taken as the display mode of the bonus rush icon indicating that the USH mode is controlled will be described.

Specifically, the effect executing means according to the feature unit 022SH may display the display mode of the bonus rush icon in a display mode according to the number of continuations of the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). For example, when the effect executing means is controlled to the big hit gaming state by executing variable display of 50 fluctuations or more in the small hit RUSH mode (small hit RUSH).
When the profit level in the mode is high), the display mode of the bonus rush icon is set to the yellow display mode.

Further, the effect executing means is a bonus when the variable display of less than 50 fluctuations is executed in the small hit RUSH mode and controlled to the big hit gaming state (when the profit degree in the small hit RUSH mode is low). -The display mode of the rush icon is set to the blue display mode. Thereby, the number of continuations for each small hit RUSH mode can be suggested to the player by the display mode of the bonus rush icon. Therefore, when the bonus rush icon displays more yellow display modes than blue, the player can obtain a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and thus can improve the interest of the game.

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 022SH)
Next, a modification 5 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 022SH, the display mode of the bonus rush icon when the jackpot game is completed is one display mode (for example, red). In the fifth modification, a case where a plurality of display modes can be taken as the display mode of the bonus rush icon when the big hit game is completed will be described.

Specifically, the effect executing means according to the feature unit 022SH may display the display mode of the icon image of the bonus rush icon in a display mode according to the type of jackpot.
For example, when the big hit game of the 10R probability variation big hit A is performed, the effect executing means sets the display mode of the bonus rush icon to the red display mode. As a result, the bonus rush icon is displayed in a red display mode, which suggests the continuation of the small hit RUSH mode (continuation of the consecutive villas). Further, when the big hit game of the 10R probability variation big hit B or the big hit game of the 10R normal big hit is performed, the effect executing means sets the bonus rush icon in the green display mode. As a result, the bonus rush icon is displayed in a green display mode, which suggests the end of the small hit RUSH mode (end of the consecutive villa).

Further, in the embodiment according to the feature unit 022SH, the jackpot type that can continue the small hit RUSH mode is one type of the 10R probability variation jackpot A, but may be a plurality of types. For example, the jackpot type that can continue the small hit RUSH mode may be a 5R probability variable jackpot in addition to the 10R probability variable jackpot A. In this case, the effect execution means is a bonus when the jackpot game of 10R probability variation jackpot A is performed.
The display mode of the rush icon is set to the red display mode. Further, the effect executing means sets the bonus rush icon in an orange display mode when the big hit game of the 5R probability variation big hit is performed. Thereby, the given game value can be suggested by the display mode of the bonus rush icon. Therefore, when the bonus rush icon displays more red than orange, the player can obtain a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and can improve the interest of the game.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 022SH)
Next, a modification 6 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 022SH, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the display mode is changed before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed). Icon image from the bottom 2
The second icon image was 022SH120b. In place of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 6, the icon of the target whose display mode is changed before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed). The image may be the third icon image 022SH120c from the bottom (see FIG. 12-11).

Specifically, in the above-described embodiment relating to the feature unit 022SH, the second icon image 022SH120b from the bottom of the bonus rush icon is displayed before the start of the jackpot game.
The case where the display mode is provided with a color (yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled has been described. In the modification 6, before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed), the third icon image 022 from the bottom in the bonus rush icon.
SH120c (see FIG. 12-11) may be a colored display mode indicating that a jackpot is to be performed.

Specifically, when there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination, an effect of adding red to the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom may be performed. Even with such a configuration, it can be suggested that the next big hit will be executed before the big hit starts.

Further, the display mode after the change of the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom is not limited to the display mode with red color, and may be a display mode according to the jackpot type. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot type obtained by the look-ahead determination for the hold memory corresponding to the hold display 022SH111 is the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the icon image 022 of the third eye from the bottom.
SH120c may be displayed in red, and may be displayed in pink in the case of 10R probability variation jackpot B or normal jackpot. As a result, the icon image 022SH of the third eye from the bottom
The display mode (color) of 120c can indicate the type of jackpot to be executed.

In addition to this, for example, when the jackpot type obtained by the look-ahead determination for the hold memory corresponding to the hold display 022SH111 is the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom is blinking at the blinking speed. It may be easy to become a fast blinking mode. Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot B or the normal jackpot, the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom may be likely to be in a lighting mode with a slow blinking speed. Thereby, the display mode (blinking mode) of the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom can suggest the jackpot type that is likely to be executed.

(Variation example 7 of the feature portion 022SH)
Next, a modification 7 of the feature portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature unit 022SH described above, the bonus rush icon can be displayed from the start of the big hit that triggers the start of the small hit RUSH mode to the end of the big hit that ends the small hit RUSH mode. And said. In place of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 7, even if the small hit RUSH mode ends and the mode shifts to the Chantime mode (first KT state) (falls), a bonus is provided. A case where the rush icon can be continuously displayed will be described.

In the small hit RUSH mode, when the big hit game of 10R probability variation big hit B or 10R normal big hit is executed, it is controlled to the chance time mode (first KT state: high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state). Here, even during the chance time mode, it is quite possible that a big hit will occur. Therefore, in the modification 7, the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed even during the chance time mode.

For example, in the Chantime mode, all the icon images of the bonus rush icon are displayed in a colored state. In addition, the timing for erasing the bonus rush icon may be when shifting from the Chantime mode to the normal mode. In addition, when the big hit game of 10R probability variation big hit A is performed in the Chantime mode, that is, when the big hit game to shift to the small hit RUSH mode is performed, the bonus rush icon displayed is blank. You can add and display the icon image of.

In addition, the bonus rush icon may be continuously displayed only in the Chantime mode in the high probability / high base state. At least when controlled to a high probability / high base state,
It is confirmed that another big hit will be made. Therefore, during the big hit game (10R probability variation big hit B) that shifts (falls) from the small hit RUSH mode to the Chantime mode,
You may add one blank icon image to the bonus rush icon. As a result, even if the player falls into the Chantime mode, the player hopes that at least the jackpot that has been confirmed to occur once more will be the 10R probability variation jackpot A (shift to the small hit RUSH mode). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the Chantime mode.

In addition, is the Chantime mode controlled in a high probability / high base state, or is it a low probability /
This is an effect mode that prevents the player from discriminating whether the control is performed in a high base state. Here, if a bonus rush icon with one blank icon image added is displayed in the Chantime mode, it is possible for the player to determine that the control is performed in a high probability / high base state. Become. Therefore, when displaying the bonus rush icon when it is controlled in the high probability / high base state, another notification that it is in the high probability / high base state is performed without controlling to the Chantime mode. It may be controlled to the production mode.

In addition, when controlled to a high probability / high base state, an effect determination is made as to whether or not to continuously display the bonus rush icon, and the bonus rush icon is continued according to the result of the effect determination. May be displayed. Specifically, when a positive determination result is obtained by the effect determination, a bonus rush icon to which one blank icon image is added may be displayed in a high probability / high base state. As a result, even if the bonus rush icon is not displayed, it may be controlled in the high probability / high base state, so the player hopes that the game is controlled in the high probability / high base state. can do.

In addition, also in the modification 7, when adding a blank icon image, a suggestion effect (see, for example, FIGS. 12-8 (L) and (M)) may be performed. Also, as a suggestion effect
One of the effects selected by judgment, with the effects that are likely to be added two blank icon images, the effects that are likely to be added one, and the effects that are unlikely to be added. You may want to perform the production. This makes it possible to improve the interest of suggestive production.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 022SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature unit 022SH, a pachinko gaming machine that controls a special state, which is more frequently controlled to a small hit gaming state than a normal state, is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-).
No. 156952). Further, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that displays a preview image corresponding to a high probability state and a high base state in the game state after the end of the big hit during a round game in the big hit game state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016). -135166 (Ab.). However, simply notifying the player of the game state after the end of the big hit does not allow the player to clearly grasp the state in which the game value can be given thereafter, which is not interesting.

(Means 1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 022SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (
For example, in a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game, in a game state control means for controlling a game state (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6). A portion for executing steps S120 to S128) and an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) are provided, and the game state control means has an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to control a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) and a special state in which the gaming value is easily given by the special state (for example, the second KT state), and the advantageous state (for example). , This jackpot gaming state: 10R probability variation jackpot A) can be controlled to the special state, and after being controlled to the special state, the advantageous state (for example, for the second special symbol in FIG. 12-2) The next jackpot game state using the jackpot type determination table: 10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B, or 10R normal jackpot can be controlled, and the effect executing means is in the advantageous state (for example, for example). This big hit game state: When controlled to the 10R probability variation big hit A), a state in which the game value can be given as a state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the second KT state and the next big hit game state). Specific display corresponding to the existence of multiple (Fig. 12)
-6 (C) bonus rush icon 022SH120) can be displayed (for example, the process performed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in step 022SHS15 in FIG. 12-3).
..

According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that there are a plurality of states in which the game value can be given as the state after the advantageous state in the advantageous state by the specific display. Thereby, it is possible to clarify the state in which the game value can be subsequently given depending on the advantageous state.
Therefore, for example, the satisfaction of the player in an advantageous state can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

(Means 2)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 022SH, in the gaming machine described in the means 1, the effect executing means has the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state: 10R probability variation jackpot A) and the gaming. Corresponds to a controlled state (for example, this big hit game state: 10R probability variation big hit A) among a plurality of states (for example, a second KT state and the next big hit game state) to which value can be given. Then, the display mode of the specific display can be changed (FIG. 12).
The display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH 120 can be changed to the red display mode indicating that the jackpot has been completed, which is shown in step 022SHS52 of -5 and FIG. 12-6 (E)).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the specific display can be changed according to the progress of the game. This makes it possible to clarify the state in which the game value has already been given. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game in the state where the game value is given by the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction due to the fact that the game value has already been given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

(Means 3)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 022SH, in the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2, a plurality of different display modes (for example, a red display mode and a yellow display mode) are displayed in the specific display. The effect executing means includes the advantageous state (for example, the current big hit game state: 10R probability variation big hit A) and a plurality of states (for example, the second) to which the game value can be given.
Among the states including the KT state and the next big hit game state), the display mode corresponding to the controlled state (for example, step 022SHS52 in FIG. 12-5 and FIG. 12-6 (E) is shown.
The red display mode corresponding to the completion of the jackpot game and step 022SHS16 in FIG. 12-3.
And the specific display of the yellow display mode (yellow display mode indicating that the control is controlled to the second KT state) shown in FIG. 12-6 (E) can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the type of the state in which the game value has already been given, depending on the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can easily grasp the type of the state to which the game value is given. Therefore, the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction according to the type of the state in which the game value has already been given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 4)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3, as the gaming machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means corresponds to the controlled advantageous state (for example, FIG. 12). The specific display of the red display mode corresponding to the completion of the big hit game shown in -6 (E) and the specific display of the predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states to which the game value can be given (for example, FIG. The blank icon image 022SH120d, 120e) shown in the bonus rush icon 022SH120 of 12-8 (M) can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the state in which the game value has already been given and the state in which the game value can be given thereafter, depending on the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can easily grasp the state in which the game value is given and the state in which the game value can be given thereafter. Therefore, the player can obtain a feeling of satisfaction due to the fact that the game value has already been given, and a feeling of expectation that there is a state in which the game value can be given thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 5)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4, as the gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means is in the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state).
The specific display can be displayed (for example,) over a plurality of states including a plurality of states (for example, a second KT state and a next big hit game state) to which the game value can be given. As shown in FIGS. 12-6 (E) and 12-6 (F), from the jackpot gaming state to the second KT state,
Bonus rush icon 022SH120 can be displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously show the player a state in which the game value can be given even if the state changes from an advantageous state to a state in which the game value can be given. This will result in
Even if the state changes, the player can continuously obtain a feeling of satisfaction that the game value has already been given and a feeling of expectation that there is a state in which the game value can be given thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game.

(Means 6)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5, as the gaming machine of the means 6 according to the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means is in the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state: 10R probability change). The game value given in the jackpot A jackpot (for example, FIG. 12-6)
(E) Total prize ball number display 022SH130) and game value given in the special state (for example, the second KT state) (for example, total prize ball number display 022SH130 in FIG. 12-6 (H)).
) Can be displayed over the advantageous state (for example, the first big hit game state) and the special state.

According to such a configuration, even if the state changes, the game value given in the advantageous state and the special state can be clearly shown. As a result, the player can continuously grasp the assigned game value even if the state changes. Therefore, for example, when the given game value is large, the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction, and when the given game value is unexpectedly low, the player's willingness to play. Can stir up. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 7)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6, as the gaming machine of the means 7 according to the feature unit 022SH, the effect executing means is in an advantageous state after being controlled to the special state (
For example, when it is controlled to the next big hit game state), it is suggested that it is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state after that (for example, the suggestive effect of FIG. 12-8 (L)). Image 022SH116) is executed, and the game value is set as a state after being controlled to the advantageous state after the above, corresponding to the effect result of the suggestion effect (for example, the success effect image 022SH127 in FIG. 12-8 (M)). A predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of possible states (for example, FIG. 1).
It is possible to display the specific display of step 022SHS36 in 2-4 and the blank display mode shown in the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in FIG. 12-8 (M)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to incite whether or not there are a plurality of states (specifically, whether or not the consecutive villas will continue) in which the game value can be subsequently given in the later advantageous state. .. Therefore, even in the later advantageous state, the interest in the advantageous state can be improved as in the case of the earlier advantageous state.

(Means 8)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means 8 according to the feature unit 022SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7, an advantageous state before being controlled to the special state (for example, the current jackpot gaming state: 10R probability variation jackpot A) and an advantageous state after being controlled to the special state (for example,
In the next big hit game state), a common number of round games (for example, 10 rounds) is executed, and the effect executing means is controlled to the previous advantageous state and to the later advantageous state. A common display mode (for example, the display mode of the bottom icon image 022SH120a shown in FIG. 12-6 (E) and the top icon image shown in FIG. 12-7 (N)) when controlled. The display mode of 022SH120c can display the specific display of the common display mode).

According to such a configuration, the game value given in each advantageous state can be made equal, so that the specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be a common display mode. Specifically, the display mode (for example, blank) of the specific display corresponding to the advantageous state that can be given is a common display mode (for example, a blank of the same shape) between the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state. Can be. Further, the display mode (for example, red) of the specific display corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can also be a common display mode between the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state. Therefore, for example, the player can easily grasp the estimation of the game value that can be given and the estimation of the game value that has been given by the number of specific displays. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific display.

(Means 9)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8, as the gaming machine of the means 9 according to the feature unit 022SH, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification are performed. Variable display execution means (for example, variable display execution means that can execute variable display of information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel
For example, the game state control means further includes the process executed by the CPU 103 shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-21, and the game state control means derives and displays a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) as a display result of the variable display. At that time, the advantageous state can be controlled, and the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player than the variable display of the first identification information (for example, FIG. 12-2 (A)). As shown in the jackpot type determination table of (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol has a higher rate of being determined to be the 10R probability variation jackpot A, and also.
When the jackpot with a large number of rounds is selected), the effect executing means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, the specific display is erased (for example, step 022SHS in FIG. 12-3).
13: YES → Step 022SHS17: YES → Shown in Step 022SHS18,
Processing performed by the effect control CPU 120).

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 022SH can simultaneously execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to display a specific display when it is controlled to an advantageous state based on. Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 022SH has a lower advantage for the player in the variable display of the first identification information than in the variable display of the second identification information, the specific display is specified in the variable display of the first identification information. By deriving and displaying the result, the state in which the game value can be given may disappear. Here, even though the state in which the game value can be given has disappeared, if the specific display is displayed, the interest of the game is lowered. Therefore, when the gaming machine of the means 9 is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information, the specific display is erased. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by controlling the first identification information in an advantageous state based on the variable display.

(Means 10)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9, as the gaming machine of the means 10 according to the feature unit 022SH, the gaming state control means has a specific display result (for example, a big hit) as a display result of a variable display. When the symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state can be controlled, and the effect executing means is performed before the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (design).
For example, the specific display can be displayed (eg, FIG. 12-12 (B)) while the variable display is being executed.
Blank icon images 022SH120d, 120e can be added).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing of displaying the specific display and the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to improve not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the variable display.

(Means 11)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means 11 according to the feature unit 022SH, the display result showing that the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state for the variable display which has not been started yet in the gaming machine described in the means 10. The pre-start determination means for determining (for example, pre-reading determination) is provided, and the effect executing means can display the specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means (for example, FIG. 12). As shown in -11 (B), the icon image 022SH1
The display mode of 20b can be changed to a yellow display mode indicating that the second KT state is controlled).
Is.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing of displaying the specific display and the timing of changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, it is possible to improve not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the hold storage before the variable display.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... LED control board 15 ... Relay board 17 ... Special variable winning ball device 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A game state control means for controlling the game state, and
Production execution means and
Equipped with
The game state control means can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a small hit state that is different from the advantageous state, and a special state in which the game value is easily given by the small hit state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state in which game value is more easily given by being controlled to the small hit state than the first special state.
After being controlled to the first advantageous state, it can be controlled to the first special state.
After being controlled to the second advantageous state, it can be controlled to the second special state.
When the effect executing means is controlled to the second advantageous state, the effect execution means is controlled to the second advantageous state and then to the second special state, and after being controlled to the second special state, the advantageous state is controlled. A specific display suggesting that the state is controlled is displayed, and when the advantageous state controlled after being controlled by the second special state is again the second advantageous state, the specific display remains displayed. A gaming machine that additionally displays the specific display .

Images